JP7209301B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pinball game machine (generally called a "pachinko machine") and a reel-type game machine (generally called a "pachislot machine").

Conventionally, there has been known a game machine that changes the effect according to the operation mode of the operation device such as the effect button when performing the effect based on the lottery result when the game ball passes through the starting hole (for example, See reference 1).

JP 2011-245186 A

However, it has become difficult to suppress the decline in interest in the game simply by changing the aspect of the presentation in various ways by the player's operation. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of executing an effect suitable for enhancing interest in a game.

launching means for selectively launching game balls into a first area of the game area and a second area different from the first area based on the operation of the player; A specific start opening capable of accepting a driven game ball, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the specific start opening, and when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win. , an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect, and a game ball that is set in the second area and hit in a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the game state in which the game ball is hit in the first area. and a specific detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the specific area, wherein the effect executing means, in a period during which the specific effect is executed a special effect indicating which one of a plurality of types of winning results is obtained based on the fact that the specific detecting means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the second area; can be executed, and the special effect can be executed based on the fact that the result of the lottery is the result of the specific win, and the specific effect is executed before the specific win gaming state is started. It is an effect that is executed based on the game ball passing through the area, but is not executed even if the game ball passes through the specific area after the end of the specific winning game state, and the game ball passes through the specific area. During the period in which the specific effect is executed in which the special effect is made executable based on the fact that the game is played, a display prompting the player to launch the game ball into the second area is executed, and the lottery is performed. A game is played when the specific detection means detects that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the specific area in a state in which the player is not notified of the winning even though the result of the lottery by the means is a win. A gaming machine characterized in that a special notification different from the special performance can be executed for a player.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing an effect suitable for improving the interest of a game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. 1 is a plan view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit of the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the top. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the bottom. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the mounting base unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting base unit exploded and viewed from below; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit, which is exploded and viewed from above; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit when it is exploded and viewed from below; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the top. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the button unit and looked from the bottom. It is a top view of a plate unit. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the effect operation unit on the AA cross section in FIG. 31; FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the production operation unit on the BB cross section in FIG. 31; (a) is a front view of the door lower right direction unit of the plate unit, and (b) is a right side view of the door lower right direction unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right direction production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door lower right direction production unit from the back. It is a CC cross-sectional view of the door lower right effect unit of FIG. 34(b). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door lower right production|presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door lower right production|presentation unit, and was seen from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rotary body internal unit of the door lower right direction production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rotary body internal unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit facing forward, and (b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing backward. (a) is a front perspective view of the upper tray ball extractor unit attached to the dish unit base, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper dish ball extractor unit attached to the dish unit base. Figure 2 is a viewed perspective view; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper bowl ball extraction unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the upper bowl ball extraction unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of a lower tray ball removing unit of the tray unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the lower tray ball removing unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked down on the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked down on the game board from the back. It is a front view of the game board omitting the front side of the game ball guideway unit. FIG. 51(a) is an enlarged view of the game ball guideway unit, and FIG. 51(b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the game ball guideway unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of a game board in which a movable accessory is in motion; FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board according to another mode in which a movable accessory is operating; FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board according to still another form in which a movable accessory is operating; FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the falling movable accessory seen from the front, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the falling accessory seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the falling accessory from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the falling accessory from the back. It is a front view which shows the 1st operation|movement of a falling accessory. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a second motion of the falling movable accessory; FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board according to another mode in which a movable accessory is operating; It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 62 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 61; It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball lending device connection terminal plate that relays electrical connections between a payout control board that constitutes the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 62 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 61; 3 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control part. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 68 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 67; It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 74 is a circuit diagram continued from FIG. 73; It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit; FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; 80 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 79 to the peripheral control boards; It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in a main control board; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs; 6 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of special control processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hit game start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit game processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of small hit game processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means. It is a table|surface which shows each characteristic for every classification of a big hit. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table that can be selected in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decorative design variation start processing (step S1210). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination processing (step S1225a) of the stop design in 1st production|presentation mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination processing (step S1225b) of the stop design in 2nd production|presentation mode. (a) is a diagram for explaining the extension effect pattern at the time of the big win, (b) is a diagram for explaining the extension effect pattern at the time of the small win, and (c) is a view for explaining the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the big win. It is a diagram for explaining, and (d) is a diagram for explaining a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when one of the effect commands "01H" to "04H" is received from the main control MPU 4100a side; 10 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when one of the effect commands "09H" to "11H" is received from the main control MPU 4100a side; (a) is a table showing the degree of expectation for a big hit in the first production mode for each production content series, and (b) is the degree of expectation for entering the challenge bonus in the second production mode. etc. for each production content series. 10 is a time chart showing another example of display effect patterns associated with the effect command "01H" in the first effect mode; 10 is a time chart showing another example of display effect patterns associated with the effect command "02H" in the first effect mode; It is an example of an effect display screen in which the upper plate side liquid crystal display device and the game board side liquid crystal display device are synchronized.

A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a door frame base unit 100 attached to the front lower part of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side portion attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball stored in the upper dish 201 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 through the tray unit 200. A handle unit 500 that a player can operate to hit the ball into the game area of the game board 5, and a plate unit 200 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and receives the game ball that fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower tray 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and feeds the game balls on the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 680, and the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 attached to the right side of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , and a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out game balls to the player side. A letter-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 which are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 on the lower side are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board housed in the payout control board box 950. A payout device 830 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides downward the game balls paid out by the payout device 830, and normally releases the game balls according to the state of the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. An upper full ball path unit 850 to be released from either a discharge port or a full ball discharge port, and a game ball discharged from the normal discharge port of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 forward The game ball released from the normal guideway and the full tank discharge opening is guided forward from the front end to the full tank ball receiving opening 530 of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball path unit 860 with a leading full taxiway.

The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view and having a bass speaker inside. a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side of the front view and containing a power supply board; An interface control board box 940 housing a board, and a payout control board box that is attached across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and houses a payout control board for controlling the payout of game balls. 950 and.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls shot from the ball launching device 680 into the upper part of the game area 5a. A front structural member 1000 having a guide rail 1001 that guides to, a flat plate-like game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, and the rear side of the game panel 1100 A box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part and open upward, and a main control board which is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 and accommodates a main control board for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1 inside. A substrate box 1300, a front unit (not shown) having a plurality of winning holes attached in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving game balls hit into the game area 5a (not shown), and a substrate A back unit (not shown) is provided which is attached to the upper side of the box 1200 and to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and has a liquid crystal display device which can be viewed from the player side through the game panel 1100 .

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle lever 504 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 201, the ball shooting device 680 plays a game with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. . Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 201 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 11 is a rear view of the door frame. 12 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, a tray unit 200 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a top portion attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100. A unit 350, a left side unit 400 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a front right portion of the door frame base unit 100. and a handle unit 500 attached through the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the door frame 3 includes a foul cover unit 520 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feed unit 540 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 560 for closing the through-hole 111 and a security cover 580 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560 are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a vertically long rectangular outer shape and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, A cylindrical handle mounting member 120 for mounting the handle unit 500 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner in front view, and a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. and the door frame side which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side in the front view, protrudes forward and is rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. An upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, and a glass unit mounting member 160 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 560. there is

The plate units 200 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, are arranged in a row vertically and protrude forward to include an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing game balls. and a plate-like dish unit base 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 attached to the dish unit base 210 on the front side of the upper dish 201 and capable of displaying an image. A production operation unit 220 having a touch panel 246 and an upper plate production button 257 that can be operated by a player, a plate unit cover 260 covering the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 from the front side, and a plate unit cover 260 on the right side of the upper plate 201 when viewed from the front. A door lower right performance unit 270 having a door lower right rotating body 270A arranged and rotated according to a game state, a transparent performance unit cover 300 covering the door lower right performance unit 270 from the front side, and an upper tray. An upper tray ball extracting unit 310 for extracting game balls stored in the lower tray 201 to the lower tray 202, a lower tray ball extracting unit 320 for extracting the game balls stored in the lower tray 202 downward, and a game hall. A ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine (illustration omitted. Also referred to as a CR unit) arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and attached to the top of the plate unit base 210 A top plate decoration member 340 capable of cage light emission decoration is mainly provided.

The top unit 350 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. A translucent top decorative member 370 that is attached in the center of the left and right on the front surface of 360 and bulges forward and has a translucency, and a top speaker ( (not shown), and a door-frame decoration substrate 380 attached to the rear side of the unit base 360 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front surface thereof.

The left side unit 400 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. A translucent left side decorative member 420 attached to the front surface of the base 410 and having an upper end extending to the left end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350; 3 and a left speaker unit 430 having a left speaker (not shown), and a door frame attached to the rear side of the unit base 410 and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the front. A left decorative substrate 440 is provided.

The right side unit 450 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. A translucent right side decorative member 470 attached to the front side of the base 460 and having an upper end extending to the right end of the top decorative member 370 of the top unit 350; 3 and a right speaker unit 480 having a right speaker (not shown), and a plurality of LEDs mounted between the unit base 460 and the right side decorative member 470 on the front. is attached to the door frame right decorative substrate (not shown);

15 and 16, the handle unit 500 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the handle body 502 attached to the handle attachment member 120 of the door frame base unit 100. A handle lever 504 that can be rotated by the player, and a handle cover 506 that is attached to the handle body 502 from the front side of the handle lever 504 and cooperates with the handle body 502 to rotatably support the handle lever 504. and has. Although not shown, the handle unit 500 includes a handle operation sensor that is attached inside the handle body 502 and detects the rotation angle of the handle lever 504, and a handle operation sensor that is attached to the handle body 502 and can be operated by the player. A stop button and a contact detection sensor mounted inside the handle body 502 for detecting contact between the player and the handle lever 504 are provided.

The foul cover unit 520 of the door frame 3 is, as shown in FIGS. and a flat plate-like lid member 524 attached to the front surface. The foul cover unit 520 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and the through ball passage that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full tank ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 210a of the tray unit 200. 526, a full ball receptacle 528 that opens rearward on the right side of the through ball passage 526 in front view and can communicate with the full tank guiding path of the lower full tank ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4; The right side of the ball socket 528 is open upward in front view, and a foul ball receives a game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 5a despite being shot by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. A ball receiving port 530 and a lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit 200 are opened forward at the lower right corner in a front view and discharge game balls received in the full ball receiving port 528 and the foul ball receiving port 530. and a ball outlet 532 in communication with 210c.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the ball feeder unit 540 of the door frame 3 is attached to a box-shaped unit body 542 extending to the left and right and having an open rear side, and to the rear side of the unit body 542. A unit cover 544 which has a box shape with an open front side and is detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 520 in front view, and an upper plate of the plate unit 200 which opens forward. A ball entry port 546 into which game balls stored in the 201 enter, a ball discharge port 548 which is capable of releasing the game balls entering the ball entry port 546 and which opens toward the rear, and a ball entry port. A ball discharge port 550 is provided below the ball entrance 546 and opens forward to discharge the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 546.例文帳に追加Although not shown, the ball feeding unit 540 includes a ball feeding solenoid for discharging the game balls that have entered from the ball entrance 546 one by one from the ball discharge port 548, and a game ball that has entered from the ball entrance 546. a switching mechanism for switching to either the ball discharge port 548 side or the ball discharge port 550 side.

The glass unit 560 of the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. and a pair of glass plates 564 closing the inside of the cage unit frame 562 .

The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 17 to 33. FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the tray unit. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the effect operation unit of the plate unit, and FIG. 22 is a rear perspective view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above, and FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from below. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the installation base unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the installation base unit, viewed from below.

Also, FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit of the effect operation unit exploded and viewed from above, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the touch unit exploded and viewed from below. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the button unit, viewed from below. 31 is a plan view of the plate unit, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the production operation unit in the AA section in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 is a production operation in the BB section in FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the unit;

Further, FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the door lower right effect unit of the plate unit, (b) is a right side view of the door lower right effect unit, and FIG. 35 is a front view of the door lower right effect unit. FIG. 36 is a perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from behind. FIG. 37 is a CC sectional view of the door lower right effect unit in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the door lower right effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 40 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body internal unit of the door lower right effect unit, and FIG. 41 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body internal unit. FIG. 42(a) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body of the door lower right effect unit facing forward, and FIG. 42(b) is a front view of the door lower right rotating body facing backward.

FIG. 43(a) is a front perspective view of the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base, and FIG. 43(b) is the upper dish ball removing unit attached to the dish unit base. It is the perspective view seen from the back in the state. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the upper tray ball extractor unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the upper tray ball extractor unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 46(a) is a front perspective view of the lower tray ball extractor unit of the tray unit, and FIG. 46(b) is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray ball extractor unit.

The plate unit 200 protrudes forward from the door frame base unit 100 . The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 for storing game balls to be paid out from the payout device 830 and hit into the game area 5a, and a game ball which is arranged below the upper tray 201 and supplied from the upper tray 201. and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls. The plate unit 200 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 210 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an upper plate 201 which is attached to the front upper portion of the plate unit base 210 and has a left side bulging forward from the left and right center. and a lower plate body 214 attached to the lower front portion of the plate unit base 210 at the center in the left-right direction and protruding forward to form the lower plate 202. .

In addition, the plate unit 200 covers the front side of the upper plate main body 212 and the front side of the plate unit base 210, the upper plate main body 212, the lower plate main body 214, and the front and lower sides of the production operation unit. A dish unit cover 260 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210, a door lower right presentation unit 270 arranged on the right side of the presentation operation unit 220 and attached to the front right part of the dish unit base 210, and a door lower right presentation unit. A performance unit cover 300 attached to the front surface of a plate unit base 210 covering the front side of 270, and game balls attached so as to sandwich the plate unit base 210 from the front and back and stored in the upper plate 201 of the upper plate body 212. and a lower tray ball extracting unit 310 attached to the lower side of the lower tray main body 214 for ejecting downward the game balls stored in the lower tray 202. 320 and .

Furthermore, the plate unit 200 includes a ball lending operation unit 330 for operating a ball lending machine which is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit 220 and which is arranged adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, and a plate. An upper dish top decorative member 340 attached to the upper part of the unit base 210 and capable of light emitting decoration, and an upper dish top decorative member 340 attached to the front left side of the dish unit base 210 on the rear side of the dish unit cover 260 and capable of emitting light forward. A plate unit left decorative board 345 having a plurality of LEDs is attached to the front right side of the plate unit base 210 on the rear side of the effect unit cover 300 and below the door lower right effect unit 270. A plate unit right decorative substrate 346 equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light, a top plate front decoration substrate 233 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 210 and described later, a top plate rear decoration substrate 235, and a top plate. Liquid crystal substrate 241, vibration device 242, touch panel 246, production button decoration substrate 251, production button press sensor 258, door lower right relay substrate 281, plate unit left decoration substrate 345, and plate unit right decoration substrate 346 and game board 5 A plate unit relay board 347 for relaying connection with a peripheral control board (not shown) is provided.

The plate unit base 210 of the plate unit 200 extends laterally over the entire width of the door frame base unit 100 as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 . The plate unit base 210 has an upper plate ball supply port 210a that penetrates in the front-back direction near the upper left corner in a front view and extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a plate unit base 210 that penetrates in the front-rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 210a. A speaker slit 210b consisting of a plurality of elongated holes extending upward and downward, a lower dish ball supply port 210c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at the lower part of the left-right center when viewed from the front, and a lower dish. An upper plate ball feed port 210d is provided which penetrates in the front-rear upper right side of the ball feed port 210c and extends vertically, the upper portion of which is positioned at the right end of the upper plate main body 212. - 特許庁

Further, the plate unit base 210 includes a through hole 210e having a rectangular inner periphery and a plate-like plate projecting forward from the lower side of the through hole 210e. A piece 210f, an escape port 210g penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the upper tray ball feed port 210d in front view, and a front and back lower right corner penetrating therethrough, through which the handle mounting member 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. a cylinder insertion opening 210i that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted; and a notch portion 210j that is cut forward from the rear end of the side surface.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the upper plate main body 212 of the plate unit 200 is shaped like a container that is open upward and rearward, with the left side bulging forward from the left and right center when viewed from the front. ing. The upper plate main body 212 is provided with a guide passage portion 212a which is opened only to the left and rear on the right end side when viewed from the front and through which game balls can flow. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowered as a whole. More specifically, when the upper tray main body 212 is attached to the tray unit base 210, the bottom surface of the upper tray main body 212 moves from the lower position of the upper tray ball feed port 210a to the upper end of the upper tray ball feed port 210d. It is inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the . As a result, the game balls discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 210a can be received and stored in the upper tray main body 212, and the received game balls are sent from the right end side of the guide passage portion 212a. It can be supplied to the outlet 210d.

The upper plate main body 212 also has a metal ground fitting 212b extending from the center of the right and left sides to the vicinity of the right end on the rear end side of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the ground metal fitting 212b is electrically grounded (earthed), and when the game ball comes into contact with the ground metal fitting 212b, static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the lower plate main body 214 of the plate unit 200 is trapezoidal in plan view with a longer rear end than the front end, and is formed into a container shape that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 214 has a ball removal hole 214a that penetrates vertically through the bottom surface and can be closed by the lower tray ball removal unit 320, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the ball removal hole 214a. are doing. The lower tray main body 214 can receive and store game balls discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 210c of the tray unit base 210, and also allows game balls to flow downward from the tray unit 200 through the ball extraction holes 214a. can be discharged.

21 to 24, the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 is attached to the plate unit base 210 and the upper plate body 212 at the left and right center in front view, and to the mounting base unit 220A. a button unit 220C attached to the mounting base unit 220A on the left side of the touch unit 220B in front view; and a plurality of cylindrical dampers 222 interposed between the touch unit 220B and the mounting base unit 220A. , a unit cover 224 attached to the attachment base unit 220A so as to cover the outer periphery of the touch unit 220B and the button unit 220C from above, and a decorative member 226 attached to the right end of the attachment base unit 220A in front view.

The damper 222 of the effect operation unit 220 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a groove 222a is formed in the center of the outer peripheral surface in the axial direction over the entire circumference. The damper 222 in this embodiment is made of synthetic rubber. The plurality of dampers 222 can reduce the impact when the touch unit 220B is hit, thereby reducing the load (impact) acting on the mounting base unit 220 and the plate unit base 210 side. It is possible to reduce the transmission of the vibration caused by the vibrating device 242 to the mounting base unit 220 and the plate unit base 210 side.

As shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the mounting base unit 220A of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped mounting base 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and open at the top, and a A shallow box-shaped unit case 231 whose rear end is attached to the front end of the upper plate main body 212 and whose upper side is open so that the touch unit 200B can be accommodated from the upper side; A front lens member 232, an upper plate front decorative substrate 233 arranged between the upper plate front lens member 232 and the unit case 231 and provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a unit cover covering the front side of the upper plate front lens member 232. 224 and a translucent top plate front decoration member 234 attached to the plate 224 .

In addition, the mounting base unit 220A includes a top plate rear decoration substrate 235 which is attached to the rear end of the unit case 231 and has a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward, and an upper side of the top plate rear decoration substrate 235. and a translucent plate rear decorative member 236 attached to the unit cover 224, and a plate rear decorative substrate 235 sandwiched between the unit cover 224 and the unit case 231 on the front side of the plate rear decorative member 236. a linear light-emitting lens member 237 whose upper end can emit light linearly by guiding the light of the above; a cylindrical button mounting member 238 mounted on the unit cover 224 on the right side of the upper plate rear decorative member 236 when viewed from the front; and a button mounting member. 238 is attached so as to be slidable up and down.

The mounting base 230 has a flat plate-shaped mounting side receiving portion 230a that is inclined forward from approximately the center in the front and rear so that it becomes lower as it goes forward, and two parts that penetrate the mounting side receiving portion 230a and are spaced apart from each other to the left and right. It has two through holes 230b and a cylindrical receiving portion 230c extending downward from the periphery of the through hole 230b. The through-hole 230b has a rectangular inner circumference. The cylindrical receiving portion 230c is formed in a pyramidal cylindrical shape that narrows downward (see FIG. 33). More specifically, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c has a front inner peripheral wall extending substantially perpendicularly to the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a, and a rear inner peripheral wall extending downward from the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a. It extends at an angle so as to go forward as it goes to. Further, the cylindrical receiving portion 230c extends so that the inner peripheral walls on both the left and right sides are inclined with respect to the perpendicular to the surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a so that the lower ends (tips) thereof slightly approach each other.

The unit case 231 has a housing recess 231a that is open upward and can house the touch unit 220B. a pair of front support pins 231c projecting upward in a columnar shape apart from the vicinity of the front end of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a; It has a center support projection 231d projecting upward, and two receiving projections 231e spaced apart from each other to the left and right, projecting in the shape of a pyramid that narrows downward from the bottom of the housing recess 231a. .

Further, the unit case 231 is arranged around an insertion hole 231f through which the lower part of the button unit 220C is inserted, and an insertion hole 231f on the upper surface. A button unit mounting portion 231g for mounting the button unit 220C, and a linear light emitting portion 237b of a linear light emitting lens member 237 extending laterally and recessed downward from the upper end of the outer peripheral wall on the rear side of the housing recess 231a are arranged. and a notch 231h.

The housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 is formed in a shape in plan view that is a combination of a rectangle extending left and right and a trapezoid projecting outward from both left and right sides of the rectangle. In addition, the housing recess 231a is formed so that the bottom surface of the rectangular portion is lower than the bottom surfaces of the trapezoidal portions on the left and right sides. The step on the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a is formed slightly lower than the height (length in the axial direction) of the damper 222. As shown in FIG.

The four lateral support pins 231b protrude upward from the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the housing recess 231a and are formed to be insertable into the cylindrical damper 222. As shown in FIG. Further, the lateral support pin 231b has, on its upper end side, a truncated conical tapered portion 231i whose diameter decreases toward the upper end side (see FIG. 32). The horizontal support pin 231b is formed longer than the damper 222 as a whole because the distance from the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a to the middle of the tapered portion 231i is the same as the length of the damper 222 . The pair of front support pins 231c are insertable into the tubular damper 222 and formed slightly longer than half the length of the damper 222 .

The upper end of the central support projection 231d protrudes to the same height as the bottom surface of the trapezoidal portion of the accommodation recess 231a. The receiving projection 231e is formed in the shape of a truncated cone having a square outer periphery. The two receiving projections 231 e are formed at positions corresponding to the two through holes 230 b of the mounting base 230 . The front outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e extends substantially perpendicularly to the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a, and the rear outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e is inclined forward with respect to the bottom surface of the accommodating recess 231a as it goes downward. and extends. In addition, the left and right outer peripheral walls of the receiving protrusion 231e are inclined with respect to the perpendicular to the surface of the housing recess 231a so that the lower ends (tips) of the receiving protrusion 231e are slightly closer to each other. The shape of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231 e corresponds to the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230 c of the mounting base 230 . In the assembled state, the receiving projection 231e is inserted into the through hole 230a of the mounting base 231 at its lower end, and a small gap is formed between the receiving projection 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c.

The upper plate front decorative member 234 has its front surface exposed to the outside when the plate unit 200 is assembled. The upper plate rear decorative substrate 235 includes a plurality of decorative LEDs 235a for decorating the upper plate rear decorative member 236 with light emission, and a plurality of peripheral LEDs 235b for decorating the linear light emitting lens member 237 with light emission. .

The linear light-emitting lens member 237 is formed to be longer in the left and right than the upper plate rear decorative member 236. and a flat plate-like linear light emitting portion 237 b that is continuous with the unit case 231 and that is fitted into the cutout portion 231 h of the unit case 231 . In the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the linear light-emitting portion 237b is fitted into the notch portion 231h of the unit case 231, so that the front surface of the linear light-emitting portion 237a forms part of the inner peripheral wall of the housing recess 231a. Further, in the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the upper end of the linear light-emitting portion 237b is exposed to the outside when the dish unit 200 is assembled. This linear light-emitting lens member 237 can receive light from the peripheral LED 235b at the light receiving portion 237a, guide the light received at the light receiving portion 237a to the linear light emitting portion 237b, and guide the light to the linear light emitting portion 237b. The entire top end can be illuminated (linearly).

The upper tray ball extractor button 239 is attached by a button attachment member 238 so as to be vertically slidable, and has an extension piece 239a extending downward from the button attachment member 238. As shown in FIG. By pressing the upper tray ball removal button 239 downward, the upper tray ball removal unit 310 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 from the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202. )be able to.

The mounting base unit 220A can elastically support the touch unit 220B with dampers 222 inserted into the four lateral support pins 231b and the two front support pins 231c. In addition, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two projections 231e protruding downward from the unit case 231 to which the touch unit 220B is attached, and the mounting base 230 below the unit case 231 into which the lower ends of the projections 231e are inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion. As a result, when a force (impact) that moves the unit case 231 downward acts from the touch unit 220B side, the force is not immediately transmitted to the mounting side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and the unit case 231 is accommodated. The force is transmitted to the mounting base 230 side by the bottom surface of the concave portion 231a bending downward to some extent and the outer peripheral surface of the lower end of the receiving projection 231e coming into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c. That is, since the unit case 231 bends when force is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230 , the force can be transmitted to the mounting base 230 after being attenuated to some extent by the bending.

Further, the receiving protrusion 231e of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230 are inclined with respect to the surface on which they are formed (the surface parallel to the upper surface of the touch unit 220B). Since the surface is provided, part of the force transmitted from the projection 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c acts in the direction along the bottom surface of the mounting side receiving portion 230a on which the cylindrical receiving portion 230c is provided. do. As a result, the force from the receiving projection 231e (unit case 231) side is dispersed, it is possible to prevent a large force from acting on the mounting base 230 in one direction, and the mounting base 230 is less likely to be damaged. .

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the touch unit 220B of the effect operation unit 220 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 240 with an open top, an upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 mounted inside the lower case 240 from above, A pair of vibrating devices 242 arranged on both left and right outer sides of the upper liquid crystal substrate 241 in the lower case 240 , and a pair of vibrating devices 242 and the upper side of the upper liquid crystal substrate 241 are covered, and attached to the lower case 240 . A shallow box-shaped base member 243 with an opening, an upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 which is inserted into the base member 243 from above and is controlled by the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 to display images, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. A frame-like ground metal fitting 245 made of a thin metal plate that covers the outer periphery, a transparent touch panel 246 that covers the ground metal fitting 245 and the upper surface of the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and a lower case that covers the outer periphery of the touch panel 246 from above and passes through the base member 243. and a frame-shaped upper cover 247 attached to the 240 .

In addition, the touch unit 220B extends vertically from the lower end of the lower case 240 to the upper end of the upper cover 247 on the rear end surfaces of the assembled lower case 240, base member 243, and upper cover 247. A waterproof sheet-like waterproof seal 248 is provided, which extends over substantially the entire left and right rear end surfaces of the case 240 and the like, and is attached to the rear end surfaces of the lower case 240 , the base member 243 and the upper cover 247 . ing.

The outer shape of the lower case 240 corresponds to the inner shape of the accommodation recess 213a of the unit case 231, and is formed so as to be accommodated in the accommodation recess 213a. The lower case 240 includes a rectangular substrate mounting portion 240 a extending left and right, flat plate-like projections 240 b projecting from both left and right sides of the substrate mounting portion 240 a in a trapezoidal shape, and each projection 240 b extending to the outer diameter of the damper 222 . A pair of damper mounting recesses 240c which are vertically pierced with the same inner shape as the damper mounting recesses 240c and which are partly opened to the outside in the left-right direction and are spaced apart in the front-rear direction, and the damper mounting recesses 240c protrude from the inner peripheral surface of and a vibrating device mounting portion 240e to which the vibrating device 242 is mounted, which is arranged near the substrate mounting portion 240a between the pair of damper mounting recesses 240c in the projecting portion 240b.

The damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 is formed in a C shape in plan view, and the damper 222 can be inserted from the open side of the C shape. In addition, the flange portion 240d is provided over the entire circumference of the C-shaped inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240c at substantially the upper and lower centers of the damper mounting recess 240c. The flange portion 240d can be inserted into the groove 222a of the damper 222. As shown in FIG.

The vibrating device 242 includes a small vibrating drive motor 242a and a weight 242b attached to the rotating shaft of the vibrating drive motor 242a with its center of gravity eccentric. The vibrating device 242 can generate vibration by rotating a weight 242b with a vibrating drive motor 242a.

The base member 243 includes a liquid crystal mounting recess 243a formed in a shallow box shape into which the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is inserted from above, extension portions 243b extending outward from both left and right sides of the liquid crystal mounting recess 243a, A screw hole 243c that penetrates vertically at a position corresponding to the damper mounting recess 240c of the lower case 240 at the tip of the extension part 243b and is counterbored with a large diameter on the upper side is formed at the lower end side of the screw hole 243c. and a C-chamfered tapered portion 243d (see FIG. 32) whose diameter increases toward the lower end of the cage.

The inner diameter of the lower side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 allows the distal end side of the horizontal support pin 231b in the unit case 231 to pass through the taper portion 231i, and the base end side (lower side) of the taper portion 231i. It is formed in such a size that it cannot pass through.

The touch panel 246 includes tempered glass that is resistant to impact and does not break easily, a capacitive transparent sensor sheet provided on the upper surface of the tempered glass, and a frame-shaped protective cover that covers the tempered glass and the sensor sheet. ing.

In the touch unit 220B, the dampers 222 can be attached by inserting the dampers 222 into the damper attachment recesses 240c provided on the left and right sides of the lower case 240 from the open side of the C shape. At this time, the flange portion 240 d protruding from the inner peripheral surface of the damper mounting recess 240 c is inserted into the groove 222 a of the damper 222 . As a result, the damper 222 in the damper mounting recess 240c is restricted from moving in the axial direction. When the damper 222 is attached to the damper attachment recess 240c, the upper end of the damper 222 contacts the lower surface of the extension 243b of the base member 243, and the lower end of the damper 222 is positioned below the lower end (lower surface) of the lower case 240. protrude.

Also, in the touch unit 220B, the vibration driving motors 242a of the pair of vibrating devices 242 are sandwiched between the lower case 240 and the base member 243. As shown in FIG. The pair of vibrating devices 242 can generate vibration independently.

In addition, the touch unit 220B allows an image displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 to be viewed from above through the touch panel 246 . Then, an image such as a button is displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the player can operate the button of the image by touching the touch panel 246 as if operating the button of the image.

Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B has a water-proof seal 248 attached to the outer peripheral surface on the rear side, when a liquid such as a drink is spilled on the plate unit 200, the liquid does not enter the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent the touch unit 220B from being damaged due to intrusion of liquid.

29 and 30, the button unit 220C of the effect operation unit 220 includes a cylindrical unit body 250 attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g of the unit case 231 of the attachment base unit 220A, and a A production button decoration substrate 251 arranged on the side and provided with LEDs on the upper surface, and a substrate cover 252 covering the lower side of the production button decoration substrate 251 and attached to the lower side of the unit body 250 are provided.

The button unit 220C includes a cylindrical button base 253 inserted into the unit main body 250 so as to be slidable from the upper side, and a button base 253 disposed between the button base 253 and the unit main body 250, and the button base 253 is attached upward. a spring member 254 for biasing; a light guide member 255 inserted into the button base 253 and capable of guiding upward the light from the LED of the production button decoration board 251; a sheet-like diffuser lens member 256 equipped with a prism, a light-transmitting upper plate effect button 257 that covers the upper side of the diffuser lens member 256 and is attached to the button base 253, and is attached to the upper surface of the effect button decoration substrate 251. A performance button pressing sensor 258 for detecting the movement of the button base 253 to the lower end is provided.

The unit body 250 has three attachment pieces 250a extending outward from the lower end of the outer peripheral surface and attached to the button unit attachment portion 231g, and a flange-like shelf portion 250b extending inward from the lower end of the inner peripheral surface. , and a pair of through holes 250c passing through the shelf 250b along the inner peripheral surface.

The button base 253 includes a tubular lower tubular portion 253a inserted into the inner circumference of the shelf portion 250b, a conical tubular upper tubular portion 253b whose diameter increases upward from the upper end of the lower tubular portion 253a, and an upper tubular portion 253b. A claw that extends downward from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 253b and whose lower end can pass through the through hole 250c of the unit main body 250 and that protrudes outward from the lower end and can engage (abut) the lower surface of the unit main body 250. and a pair of engaging claws 253c projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the upper cylindrical portion 253b shorter than the outer diameter of the upper end, and the lower end can contact the upper surface of the shelf portion 250b of the unit body 250. A plurality of flat plate-shaped contact pieces 253d, and a detection piece 253e extending outward in a flat plate shape from the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cylinder portion 253a and the upper cylinder portion 253b and detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. ing.

The spring member 254 is a coil spring as shown. The lower end of the spring member 254 contacts the upper surface of the shelf 250 b of the unit body 250 , and the upper end of the spring member 254 is supported by a plurality of contact pieces 253 d of the button base 253 .

The light guide member 255 has a disk-shaped main body portion 255a fitted to the upper portion of the upper cylindrical portion 253b of the button base 253, and extends downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 255a to near the lower end of the lower cylindrical portion 253a of the button base 253. A plurality of cylindrical light guide portions 255b are provided. A plurality of light guide portions 255b are provided so as to correspond to the LEDs of the effect button decoration board 251, and can guide the light from the LEDs to be emitted from the entire upper surface of the main body portion 255a.

This button unit 220C is integrally assembled with a button base 253, a light guide member 255, a diffusion lens member 256, and a top plate effect button main body, which can slide up and down in the unit main body 250 together. can. These button bases 253 and the like project upward from the upper end of the unit main body 250 by the biasing force of the spring member 254, and the pair of engaging claws 253c of the button base 253 extend upward from the unit main body. By engaging with the lower surface of 250, any further rise is regulated, and the upper plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the rising end.

When the upper plate effect button 257 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring member 254, the upper plate effect button 257 and the like descend, and the detection piece 253e of the button base 253 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258, and the upper plate effect button 257 is detected by the effect button pressing sensor 258. A pressing operation of the plate effect button 257 is detected. When the button base 253 descends by pressing the upper tray effect button 257, the lower ends of the plurality of contact pieces 253d of the button base 253 come into contact with the upper surface of the shelf 250b of the unit body 250, and further descent is restricted. , the top plate effect button 257 and the like are positioned at the lower end.

In addition, the button unit 220C can light-embellish the top plate effect button 257 by causing the LED of the effect button decoration board 251 to emit light. The LED of the effect button decoration board 251 is a full-color LED, and the top plate effect button 257 can be decorated with light emission in various colors.

As shown in FIG. 32, the effect operation unit 220 of the present embodiment is assembled so that the lower end of the damper 222 attached to the damper attachment recess 240c of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B is positioned above the lower surface of the lower case 240. , a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A and the bottom surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B. Further, the tip surfaces (upper end surfaces) of the four horizontal support pins 231b of the unit case 231 are aligned with the bottom surfaces of the counterbore of the screw holes 243c of the base member 243. Movement is restricted by a plain washer on the head of a screw 227 screwed onto the upper end of the lateral support pin 231b. A tapered portion 231i formed on the upper end side of the horizontal support pin 231b and a tapered portion 243d formed on the lower end side of the screw hole 243c of the base member 243 are separated from each other.

33, the upper surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a on the lateral support pin 231b side. protruding upwards. Further, since a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 and the bottom surface of the lower case 240, the top surface of the damper 222 inserted into the front support pin 231c of the unit case 231 and the bottom A gap is also formed between the case 240 and the lower surface. A gap is also formed between the upper surface of the central support projection 231 d of the unit case 231 and the lower surface of the lower case 240 . In other words, the touch unit 220B is attached to the attachment base unit 220A with its lower surface floating in the air due to the dampers 222 inserted into the lateral support pins 231b on both left and right sides.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 220 is inserted into a cylindrical receiving portion 230c in the shape of a pyramidal tube that narrows downward in the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A. The lower end of the round pyramid-shaped receiving projection 231e is inserted. A slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c and the outer peripheral wall of the receiving protrusion 231e. As a result, in a normal state, only the vicinity of the outer circumference of the unit case 231 is attached to the attachment base 230 with the inside of the unit case 231 (the central side of the accommodation recess 231a) floating in the air.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 and the like, the effect operation unit 220 has a linear ( strips) are exposed. The length of the upper end of the linear light-emitting portion 237b is about ⅔ of the length of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. A top plate rear decorative member 236 is arranged on the rear side of the upper end of the linear light emitting portion 237b exposed along the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Further, a top plate ball removal button 239 is arranged on the right side of the top plate rear decorative member 236 when viewed from the front. Further, a button unit 220C is arranged on the left side of the touch unit 220B in front view.

The effect operation unit 220 can present various effects to the player according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. For example, by displaying an image on the top plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the image (effect image) can be presented to the player through the transparent touch panel 246 to entertain the player.

As the image displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, an image simulating an operation button is displayed, and detection of a touch by the sensor sheet 246b of the touch panel 246 can be received. An operation button can be operated, and an effect using the touch panel 246 can be enjoyed. The images displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 during the performance using the touch panel 246 are not limited to the operation buttons, and various images can be displayed.

Further, in the effect operation unit 220, since the touch unit 220B is supported in a floating state from the unit case 231 by a plurality of dampers 222, the touch unit 220B can be moved by operating the vibrating device 242 according to the game state. It can vibrate. During the performance using the touch panel 246, by vibrating the touch panel 246 (touch unit 220B) with the vibrating device 242, the vibration of the vibrating device 242 is applied to the finger, hand, etc. of the player who is in contact with the touch panel 246. It is possible to surprise the player by making him/her feel as if he or she is operating a physical operation button even though the image operation button is being operated. can be enjoyed by the player and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 220 is provided with a button unit 220C on the left side of the touch unit 220B in front view, the player is caused to press the top plate effect button 257 according to the game state, and press the top plate effect button 257. You can enjoy the operation. More specifically, the image operation buttons on the touch panel 246 tend to lack the sense of operation compared to actual operation buttons because they only touch the touch panel 246. Therefore, the operation of the top tray performance button 257 does not give a sense of incongruity, the operation of the top tray performance button 257 can be comfortably enjoyed, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. .

Since the effect operation unit 220 is arranged in a portion of the plate unit 200 protruding forward where the upper plate 201 is provided, the game can be played even when the touch unit 220B or the button unit 220C is not used during the effect. A person may hit the touch unit 220B or the like from above. On the other hand, in the effect operation unit 220, the touch unit 220B is supported by the damper 222 in a state of floating from the lower unit case 231. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above, the damper 222 is elastic. The force can absorb the impact to some extent. More specifically, when the touch unit 220B is hit or the like and an impact (load) acts from above, it is transmitted to the dampers 222 in which the left and right lateral support pins 231b are inserted, and the touch unit 220B descends while the dampers 222 is compressed. The shock from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by compressing the damper 222 supported by the lateral support pin 231b.

Further, when the touch unit 220B descends due to the impact, the lower surface of the lower case 240 contacts the upper end of the damper 222 in which the front support pin 231c is inserted, and the front support pin 231c moves downward as the touch unit 220B descends. The supported damper 222 is compressed downward. Accordingly, the impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed not only by the dampers 222 supported by the lateral support pins 231b but also by the dampers 222 supported by the front support pins 231c.

When the touch unit 220B further descends due to the impact acting on the touch unit 220B, the lower surface of the lower case 240 of the touch unit 220B abuts against the bottom surfaces on both the left and right sides of the accommodation recess 231a in the unit case 231 and the upper surface of the central support projection 231d. As a result, the impact from the touch unit 220B directly acts on the unit case 231 from the touch unit 220B without passing through the plurality of dampers 222 .

Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B descends, the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a of the unit case 231 bends due to the load from the central support projection 231d so that the center moves downward. The impact from the touch unit 220B is absorbed by the elastic force due to the bending of the bottom surface of the housing recess 231a. As the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a bends, the pair of receiving protrusions 231e protruding downward from the bottom surface of the accommodation recess 231a descends. When the receiving projection 231e is further lowered by the impact from the touch unit 220B, the lower end side of the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e abuts against the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c of the mounting base 230, thereby causing the touch unit 220B to move downward. The impact is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230 .

Since the outer peripheral wall of the projecting portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are each formed in a pyramidal shape that tapers downward, from the projecting portion 231e to the cylindrical receiving portion 230c (mounting base 230 side). The transmitted load is dispersed in a direction along the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. In this way, since the structure for absorbing the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is transmitted to the mounting base 230 in multiple layers, the impact applied to the touch unit 220B is sufficiently absorbed. The touch unit 220B, the unit case 231, the mounting base 230, and the like can be made less likely to be damaged by the impact.

In addition, the effect operation unit 220 is driven by the peripheral edge LED 235b of the upper plate rear decoration board 235 according to the game state. The upper end of 237b can be linearly illuminated. As a result, the player's interest can be attracted to the touch unit 220B, and the image displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the touch effect using the touch panel 246, etc. are enjoyed, and the interest is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the game state, the decoration LED 235a of the top tray decoration substrate 235 lights up the top tray decoration member 236 arranged on the rear side of the touch panel 220B (on the rear side of the linear light emitting part 237b). be able to. By luminous decoration of the upper plate rear decorative member 236, the interest of the player is attracted to the effect operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, like the light emission of the linear light emitting part 237b of the linear light emitting lens member 237. , and the effect presented by the effect operation unit 220 can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B having the upper tray liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the mounting base 230 of the mounting base unit 220A and the unit case 231, and the upper tray lower covering portion 262 of the tray unit cover 260, which will be described later. A waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. As a result, in the upper plate 201, even if water (water droplets) condensed on the surface of the upper plate main body 212 and the game ball due to contact with the outside air flows below the upper plate 201 (on the upper plate lower covering portion 262). , it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B, thereby preventing the touch unit 220B from malfunctioning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear plate decoration substrate 235 for decorating the rear plate decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the plate 201. Since the upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets condensed, the rear decorative substrate 235 of the upper plate is prevented from being short-circuited or corroded.

As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 is formed in a shell shape that extends laterally, bulges forward at the center of the left and right, and opens rearward. . The plate unit cover 260 has a lower plate opening 261 which opens forward at approximately the center of the left and right sides and whose rear end is closed by the plate unit base 210, and a top plate side (upper side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower plate opening 261. and an upper plate lower covering portion 262 that covers the lower side of the upper plate main body 212 and the effect operation unit 220, and the bass of the speaker unit 920 of the main body frame 4 that is arranged on the left side of the lower plate opening 261 in front view A speaker grill 263 that transmits sound from the speaker, a dish unit left decorative member 264 that is arranged above the speaker grill 263 and decorated with light emission by the dish unit left decorative substrate 345, and is arranged on the right side of the lower dish opening 261 in front view. A handle port 265 through which the rear portion of the handle body 502 of the handle unit 500 passes, a bottom plate portion 266 forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 260 and covering the lower side of the lower plate body 214, and a bottom plate at the center of the left and right. and a bottom plate opening 267 that vertically penetrates the portion 266 and is closed by the lower tray ball removing unit 320 .

The bottom plate side (lower side) of the inner peripheral wall of the lower tray opening 261 is closed by the lower tray main body 214 . The speaker grille 263 and the dish unit left decorative member 264 are made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate.

The plate unit cover 260 has a smooth surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and a rugged surface on the right side. In addition, the right side in front view has translucency almost entirely.

When the plate unit cover 260 is assembled with the plate unit 200, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 are separated from each other so that it can be grasped with one hand. As a result, when the player performs a touch operation on the touch unit 220B, the touch operation of the touch unit 220B can be stabilized by grasping the upper side of the lower plate opening 261, thereby stabilizing the touch finger (hand or arm). can be easily performed.

More specifically, in the assembled state, the thickness between the front end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm, and the thickness between the rear end upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the upper plate lower covering portion 262 is about 25 mm. The thickness from the lower surface is about 50 mm, and the front-rear distance from the front end of the upper plate lower cover portion 262 to the rear end of the touch unit 220B is about 60 mm. Also, the upper surface of the touch unit 220B is inclined about 20 degrees with respect to the horizontal. This allows the player's hand to grasp between the upper surface of the touch unit 220B and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 .

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 42, the door lower right effect unit 270 of the plate unit 200 is arranged above the handle unit 500 and on the right side of the effect operation unit 200, and rotates according to the game state. A spherical door lower right rotating body 270A for decoration with light emission is provided. The door lower right effect unit 270 is attached to a unit base 271 which is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 210 so as to close the escape port 210g and which rotatably supports the door lower right rotating body 270A. A door lower right drive motor 272, a drive gear 273 fixed to the rotary shaft of the door lower right drive motor 272, a driven gear 274 meshing with the drive gear 273 and attached to the door lower right rotor 270A, and a driven gear 274 and a shaft member 275 that rotatably supports the gear 274 and is attached to the unit base 271 .

Further, the door lower right effect unit 270 is attached to the driven gear 274 on the opposite side of the door lower right rotor 270A and is rotatably supported by the unit base 271. A base-side bearing member 277 that cooperates with the unit base 271 to rotatably support the opposite side of the rotating body 270A from the driven gear 274, and the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A attached to the unit base 271. Two rotation detection sensors 278 capable of detecting the position, a decorative member 279 attached to the unit base 271 on the left side of the door lower right rotating body 270A when viewed from the front, and a decorative member 279 attached to the rear side of the unit base 271 and attached to the front side. A door lower right base decoration board 280 having a plurality of LEDs, a door lower right drive motor 272 attached to the rear side of the unit base 271, a rotation detection sensor 278, a door lower right base decoration board 280, and a door which will be described later. A door lower right relay board 281 for relaying connection between the lower right rotating body decoration board 291 and a peripheral control board (not shown) is provided.

Door lower right rotating body 270A constitutes an outer shell and is arranged between front outer shell member 285 and rear outer shell member 286, which are hemispherical shell-shaped, respectively, and front outer shell member 285 and rear outer shell member 286. and a rotator internal unit 290 . The front shell member 285 and the rear shell member 286 are formed with semicircular notches 285a and 286a, respectively, centering on the rotation shaft. The front outer shell member 285 includes a belt decoration 285b having a metallic luster and extending in a belt shape in the circumferential direction on a translucent hemispherical shell-like surface, and a heart-shaped decoration arranged in the center of the belt decoration 285b. heart decoration 285c. On the other hand, the rear outer shell member 286 is provided with a band decoration 286b having a metallic luster and extending in a band shape in the circumferential direction on the translucent hemispherical shell-shaped surface. The band decoration 285b of the front shell member 285 and the band decoration 286b of the rear shell member 286 are formed to be connected when the front shell member 285 and the rear shell member 286 are put together.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the rotating body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 which is disk-shaped and has a plurality of LEDs on both sides, and a center of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291. The columnar first fixed shaft member 292 that extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotating body decoration substrate 291 and whose tip is attached to the shaft member 275, and the first fixed shaft member 292 It is mounted on the opposite side of the door lower right rotor decoration board 291 and extends perpendicularly to the surface of the door lower right rotor decoration board 291 . and a second fixed shaft member 293 of Although not shown, a wiring cord is inserted inside the second fixed shaft member 293 to connect the door lower right relay board 281 and the door lower right rotator decoration board 291 .

In addition, the rotating body internal unit 290 is arranged on both sides of the door lower right rotating body decorative base plate 291, and is attached to the inner side of the front outer shell member 285 and the rear outer shell member 286. A transparent flat reflector base 294 having an annular shape is provided. , a first reflector 295 attached to the reflector base 294 and having an annular shape and opening outward in the axial direction, and a first reflector 295 attached to the reflector base 294 through the annular ring and having a hexagonal shape at the center. and a second reflector 296 having a through hole 296a. The first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plated layer with metallic luster on the surface, and can reflect the light from the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 . In addition, the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 296 are provided with a plurality of flat plate-like ribs extending radially.

This rotating body internal unit 290 includes a door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291, a first fixed shaft member 292, a second fixed shaft member 293, a reflector base 294, a first reflector 295, and a second reflector 296, They are separated from each other so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 271 includes an annular ring portion 271a arranged on the rear side of the lower right rotating body 270A of the door, and a flat plate shape extending forward from a portion obliquely upper right in a front view with respect to the center of the ring portion 271a on the outer periphery of the ring portion 271a. a first projecting piece 271b projecting outward, a second projecting piece 271c projecting forward in a flat plate shape from a portion of the outer circumference of the ring portion 271a opposite to the first projecting piece 271b, and the second projecting piece 271c and a bearing groove 271d into which the front end of the second fixed shaft member 293 is inserted.

The door lower right drive motor 272 is attached to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the first protruding piece 271b in a state in which the rotating shaft passes therethrough. The driven gear 274 is formed with a larger diameter than the drive gear 273 . The shaft member 275 includes an attachment portion 275a attached to the front end of the first projecting piece 271b, and a cylindrical shaft portion 275b projecting in a tubular shape from the attachment portion 275a. The shaft member 275 can rotatably support the driven gear 274 by the outer periphery of the tubular shaft portion 275b, and can non-rotatably support the tip of the first fixed shaft member 292 by the inner periphery of the tubular shaft portion 275b.

The rotor-side bearing member 276 includes a bearing hole 276a into which the second fixed shaft member 293 is rotatably inserted, and a flat plate-like detection piece 276b extending outward. The base side bearing member 277 is attached to the front end of the second projecting piece 271c in the unit base 271 so as to close the open front end side of the U-shaped bearing groove 271d at the front end of the second projecting piece 271c. The two rotation detection sensors 278 are attached to the second protruding piece 271c symmetrically across the rotation axis of the door lower right rotating body 270A. The two rotation detection sensors 275 detect the rotation position where the heart decoration 285c of the door lower right rotating body 270A faces forward (see FIG. 42(a)) and the rotation position where the heart decoration 285c faces backward (FIG. 42(b)). ) can be detected, respectively.

The door lower right effect unit 270 of this embodiment can rotate the door lower right rotating body 270A by the door lower right drive motor 272 according to the game state, and stop so that the heart decoration 285c faces forward. Depending on whether or not, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance or the like to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, since the door lower right rotating body decoration board 291 inside the door lower right rotating body 270A is non-rotatably attached to the door lower right effect unit 270, during the rotation of the door lower right rotating body 270A, the door right side is displayed. When the lower rotating body decorative substrate 291 (the LED thereof) emits light, the position of the light emitted from the door lower right rotating body decorative substrate 291 moves as the door lower right rotating body 270A rotates, and the first reflector 295 and the second reflector 295 move. Since the direction of the light reflected and guided by the two reflectors 296 changes, the door lower right rotator 270A is decorated with light so that the light is blinking without blinking the LED of the door lower right rotator decoration board 291. Alternatively, the lower right rotating body 270A of the door can be decorated with rainbow colors by irradiating light of various colors from the LED, thereby entertaining the player.

The effect unit cover 300 of the plate unit 200, as shown in FIGS. , a decorative portion 302 formed on the outer periphery of the rotating body cover portion 301 and continuous with the decoration on the right side of the plate unit cover 260 in front view, and a locking unit 700 penetrating back and forth at the lower right side of the rotating body cover portion 301. and a cylinder insertion opening 303 through which the key cylinder 710 is inserted.

The entire production unit cover 300 is a container-like shape with an open rear and has translucency. In this effect unit cover 300, the upper side of the rotating body cover part 301 is illuminated by the door lower right base decorative board 280 of the door lower right effect unit 270, and the lower side of the rotating body cover part 301 is decorated with the dish unit right decorative board 346. decorated with luminescence.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the upper dish ball removing unit 310 of the dish unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 so as to cover the opening 210e and the receiving piece 210f of the dish unit base 210 from the front side. A cover 311 having a vertically long box-like shape with an open top and an insertion opening 311a through which an extending piece 239a of an upper tray ball extracting button 239 can be inserted; A front base member 312 attached at the upper left position in a front view, a pressure transmission member 313 rotatably supported by the front base member 312 and rotated by pressing the upper tray ball release button 239, and a pressure transmission member. and a first spring member 314 that biases 313 in the direction in which the upper tray ball removal button 239 rises.

The upper tray ball removing unit 310 includes a rear base member 315 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 210 so as to close the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210 from the rear side, and a rear base member 315. 315 and the plate unit base 210, and is attached to the rear base member 315 so as to be able to move up and down, and is in contact with the pressure transmitting member 313 from above; and a second spring member 317 biasing the slider 316 upward.

The front base member 312 includes a flat plate-like base portion 312a that extends parallel to the front surface of the dish unit base 210 and is attached to the cover 311, and a pair of flat plate-like extensions that extend forward from both left and right sides of the base portion 312a. A protruding piece 312b, a shaft supporting portion 312c recessed rearward in a U shape from the front end of the extending piece 312b, and a rear end of a first spring member 314 are provided near the lower end of the front surface of the base portion 312a. and a hook-shaped spring locking portion (not shown).

The pressure transmitting member 313 has a laterally elongated columnar shaft portion 313a whose both ends are rotatably inserted into the pair of shaft support portions 312c of the front base member 312, and a rear extension portion extending rearward from the shaft portion 313a in a flat plate shape. A projecting piece 313b and an upwardly extending piece 313c that extends upward in a flat plate shape from near the left end of the upper surface of the rearwardly extending piece 313b in a front view, and that can abut the lower end of the projecting piece 239c of the upper tray ball extraction button 239. , a downwardly extending piece 313d extending downward from the right end in front view of the lower surface of the rearwardly extending piece 313b in a flat plate shape, and a first spring protruding downward from the lower side near the left end in front view of the shaft portion 313a. and a hook-shaped spring locking portion 313e to which the front end of the member 314 is locked. The downwardly extending piece 313d is formed in a triangular shape extending downward as it goes rearward, and its lower end can abut against the upper dish ball extracting slider 316. As shown in FIG.

The rear base member 315 extends in a flat plate shape parallel to the rear surface of the dish unit base 210 and is attached to the dish unit base 210. The rear base member 315 is provided on the front surface of the base portion 315a so as to be separated from each other to the left and right. The slider support portion 315b slidably supports both the left and right ends of the ball removal slider 316, and the upper end of the base portion 315a is opened forward at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the upper tray ball feed port 210d of the tray unit base 210. An upper entrance 315c that opens downward at the rear side of the base portion 315a and through which game balls can flow is provided.

Further, the rear base member 315 includes a first guide path 315d extending downward continuously from the upper inlet 315c on the rear side of the base portion 315a and being open rearward and having a lower end curved rearward. A second L-shaped guideway 315e that extends downward from the lower side of the first guideway 315d and then extends to the left in front view, the left end of which is open to the left, and the entirety of which is open to the rear; The base portion 315a is moved back and forth so that two sides are surrounded by a flat passage cover 315f that closes the rear end side of the leftwardly extending portion of the guideway 315e and the L-shaped second guideway 315e. It has an opening 315g penetrating therethrough, and a spring locking portion 315h that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base portion 315a in a boss shape and locks the upper end of the second spring member 317. As shown in FIG.

The L-shaped second guideway 315e in the rear base member 315 is inclined such that the portion extending leftward becomes lower toward the left. As shown in FIG. 43(b), the left end of the second guide path 315e is inserted into the notch 210j of the cylindrical lower dish ball supply port 210c in the dish unit base 210. The lower plate ball supply port 210c communicates with each other.

The upper tray ball extracting slider 316 has a flat plate-like slider base 316a slidably supported by slider support portions 315b of a rear base member 315 at its left and right ends, and a tray extending forward from the left side of the center of the upper end of the slider base 316a in a front view. A transmitting piece 316b which extends upward through the opening 210e of the unit base 210 and can contact the upper surface of the receiving piece 210f with the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d of the pressure transmitting member 313, and a slider on the lower side of the transmitting piece 316b. A triangular operation transmitting portion 316c projecting downward from the rear side of the base 316a, and a hook-shaped spring engagement projecting from the front surface of the slider base 316a and engaging the lower end of the second spring member 317. and a stopping portion 316d.

In the upper tray ball removing unit 310, the upper inlet 315c of the rear base member 315 opens at the lower end of the guide passage portion 212a of the upper tray main body 212 on the right side in front view when the tray unit 200 is assembled. As a result, game balls in the upper tray 201 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 540 from the upper entrance 315c via the first guide portion 315d on the rear side of the base portion 315a.

In addition, when the upper tray ball removing button 239 is pressed downward in the upper tray ball removing unit 310 , the extension piece 239 a of the upper tray ball removing button 239 causes the pressure transmission member 313 to resist the biasing force of the first spring member 314 . Then, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d rotates about the shaft portion 313a in a downward moving direction. When the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d moves downward with the rotation of the pressure transmitting member 313, the lower end of the downwardly extending piece 313d is in contact with the transmitting piece 316b of the upper bowl ball extracting slider 316 to pull out the upper bowl ball. The slider 316 slides downward against the biasing force of the second spring member 317 .

By sliding the upper tray ball extracting slider 316 downward, the operation transmission part 316c operates the switching mechanism of the ball feeding unit 540 to switch the flow path in the ball feeding unit 540, thereby switching the first guideway. 315d side is in a state of communicating with the second guideway 315e side. As a result, the game balls in the upper tray 201 are discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 210c to the lower tray 202 through the upper entrance 315c, the first guideway 315d, the ball feed unit 540, and the second guideway 315e. , the game ball in the upper tray 201 can be pulled out.

In addition, when the downward pressure on the ball removing button 239 is released, the biasing force of the first spring member 314 and the second spring member 317 raises the ball removing slider 316 and the ball removing button 239. It can be restored to its original state.

As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the lower tray ball removing unit 320 of the tray unit 200 is attached to the lower side of the lower tray main body 214 so as to close the bottom plate opening 267 of the tray unit cover 260. A flat plate-shaped lower pan ball extractor base 321 having an opening 321a coinciding with the punch hole 214a, and a flat plate-shaped slide lid 322 which can slide left and right on the lower pan ball extractor base 321 to close the opening 321a. a knob portion 323 attached to the front end of the slide lid 322 and exposed to the outside from the front surface of the plate unit cover 260; A member 324 and a holding device 325 that holds the slide lid 322 in the position where the opening 321a is opened against the biasing force of the spring member 324 .

The opening 321a of the lower tray ball removing base 321 is formed at a position near the right side of the left and right in front view. By attaching the lower tray ball removal base 321 to the lower tray main body 212 , the slide lid 322 can be slidably supported to the left and right between the lower tray ball removal base 321 and the lower tray main body 212 . The slide lid 322 has a holding protrusion 322a held by a holding device 325 on the left end side in front view.

The holding device 325 includes a main body 325a attached to the lower tray ball extracting base 321, and a pair of holding claws 325b protruding from the main body 325a so as to be openable and closable and capable of gripping the holding projections 322a. In the holding device 325, when the holding projections 322a are inserted between the pair of open holding claws 325a and pressed toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325b are closed to hold the holding projections 322a and the pair of holding claws 325a are closed. The pawl 325b remains closed. In this state, when the holding projection 322a is moved toward the main body 325a, the pair of holding claws 325a are opened, and the holding of the holding projection 322a is released.

In the lower tray ball removal unit 320, the slide lid 322 is positioned between the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a of the lower tray main body 214 when the knob 323 (slide lid 322) is moved to the right in front view. The game balls in the lower tray 202 can be stored in the lower tray 202 without falling downward from the ball extraction hole 214a.

From this state, by operating the knob 323 to the left, the slide lid 322 slides to the left, and the opening 321a and the ball removal hole 214a communicate with each other. As a result, the game ball in the lower tray 202 can pass through the ball extraction hole 214a and the opening 321a to the lower side of the tray unit 200, so that the game ball in the lower tray 202 can be removed. At this time, since the holding protrusions 322a of the slide lid 322 are held by the pair of holding claws 325b of the holding device 325, the slide lid 322 remains open even if the operation of the knob 323 is stopped. You can continue to pull out the game ball inside.

To close the slide lid 322, the knob 323 is slightly moved to the left to open the pair of holding claws 325b to release the holding projections 322a. to close the ball removal hole 214a. Thus, by operating the knob 323 of the lower tray ball removing unit 320, the game balls can be stored in the lower tray 202, or the game balls stored in the lower tray 202 can be removed.

The ball lending operation unit 330 of the plate unit 200, as shown in FIGS. A ball lending button 332 exposed on the upper surface of the case 331 and operable by the player, a return button 333 exposed on the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the ball lending button 332 and operable by the player, A display section 334 that is visible from the player side through the upper surface of the unit case 331 behind the return button 333 is provided.

This ball lending operation unit 330 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and presses the ball lending button 332 to deposit a predetermined number of game balls into the tray unit. 200 can be lent (paid out) into the upper tray 201, and when a return button 333 is pressed, the balance of the lent cash and the prepaid card are returned after subtracting the balance of the lent amount. In addition, the display unit 334 displays the remaining number of cash or prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine, an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down, or the like.

The upper plate top decorative member 340 of the plate unit 200 is, as shown in FIGS. 340a, and an upper plate top decorative substrate 340b attached to the lower side of the upper plate top lens 340a and having a plurality of LEDs attached to the upper surface thereof.

The upper plate top decorative member 340 can cause the upper plate top lens 340a to emit light in a belt shape by causing the LED of the upper plate top decorative substrate 340b to emit light. Since the upper tray top decorative member 340 is arranged on the rear side of the effect operation unit 200, the upper tray top decorative member 340 is similar to the light-emitting decoration such as the upper tray rear decorative member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237. By decorating the 340 with light, the interest of the player can be attracted to the performance operation unit 220 such as the touch unit 220B, and the performance presented by the performance operation unit 220 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest. be able to.

The plate unit 200 of this embodiment has an upper plate 201 for storing game balls on the lower side of the game area 5a. When an image is displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 according to the game state that changes by hitting Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237, the upper tray rear decorative member 236, the upper tray top decorative member 340, etc. can be made to emit light, even if the player's line of sight is concentrated in the game area 5a, the line of sight (visual field) can be seen. The light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like entering from the outside can be noticed, and the line of sight (interest) of the player can be attracted to the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like, that is, the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 side. Therefore, in the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, when an effect such as an image is presented according to the game state, the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is caused to emit light so that the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 can be displayed to the player. It is possible to make the user aware of the presentation of the performance, and to enjoy the performance by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

Further, since the plate unit 200 is provided with the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 capable of displaying an image according to the game state, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed, it is arranged outside the game area 5a. Since the arrival of a chance is suggested by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 that is being used, the player is provided with a game within the game area 5a and an effect on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 outside the game area 5a. It can make you care about both. Therefore, by making the player pay attention to the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a (upper plate liquid crystal display device 244), it is possible to enjoy a tight game with a sense of speed, thereby reducing the interest of the player. In addition, when an image suggesting the arrival of a chance is displayed on the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, by causing the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like to emit light, the player can be directed to the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. It is possible to attract the player's attention, and to surely recognize the arrival of the chance to entertain the player. In this case, depending on the player, there is a risk that the player will be concerned about both the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a, and will not be able to concentrate on either of them, resulting in a decrease in interest. Since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light in response to the arrival of the player, the user can concentrate on the game area 5a until the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, thereby enjoying the game in the game area 5a. At the same time, when the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light, the performance on the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 can be enjoyed, and the game can be sharpened to prevent boredom.

In addition, since the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is provided in the tray unit 200 that bulges toward the player side on the lower side of the game area 5a, the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is arranged at a position close to the player. Become. As a result, the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is easily hidden by the player positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is less visible to other players next to or behind. Only the player concerned can be entertained with the effect presented by the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest in being looked at by other players while enjoying the performance by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the upper tray liquid crystal display device. The linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light when presentation of the performance by the 244 makes it difficult to overlook the performance by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the performance by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and interesting. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the linear light-emitting lens members 237 and the like are made to emit light in a strip shape, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens members 237 and the like can be made more conspicuous compared to the case where the light is emitted in a point-like manner. Even if the player's consciousness is concentrated in the game area 5a, the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be easily noticed, and the effect by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the touch panel 246, etc. can be enjoyed and interesting. It is possible to suppress the decrease. In addition, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like emits light in a band shape, the light emission mode differs from the light emission of other light-emitting decorations, etc., and it is possible to reduce misidentification as light emission from light-emitting decorations, etc. The light emitted from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like can be reliably noticed.

In addition, since the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are arranged at the rear side position near the game area 5a in the outer peripheral edge of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, when the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like are caused to emit light, The light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like can be easily entered into the player's field of view, and the player can be made aware of the light emission from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 and the like to enjoy the performance of the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244 .

In addition, the production operation unit 200 having the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 and the like is provided on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the like. Since the player turns his or her line of sight to the upper tray 201 with a certain frequency in order to check the amount of game balls to be inserted, the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, the linear light-emitting lens member 237, etc. It becomes easy to enter the field of view and to notice the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 easily. In addition, since the player turns his or her line of sight toward the upper tray 201 with a certain frequency, it is easy to direct the line of sight from within the game area 5a to the upper tray 201 (upper tray liquid crystal display device 244). Therefore, when noticing the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 or the like, the line of sight can be immediately shifted to the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect presented by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is enjoyed and the interest is reduced. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 200 is arranged on the lower side of the game area 5a, and the light from the linear light emitting lens member 237 or the like is irradiated to the player from the lower side, when it is arranged on the upper side of the game area 5a , the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be easily noticed by the player, and the player can surely pay attention to the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. The performance by the operation unit 200 can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 (upper tray liquid crystal display device 244) is arranged at a position corresponding to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, the center of the player's line of sight is located at any position in the game area 5a. Even so, the light from the linear light-emitting lens member 237 can be easily noticed, and the player can surely pay attention to the upper dish liquid crystal display device 244, and the effect by the effect operation unit 200 can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 200 is provided with the touch panel 246, it is possible to perform not only the effect by the image but also the effect of allowing the player to operate the touch panel 246, so that the player can be entertained by various effects. By making the player operate the touch panel 246, the player can participate in the production, and the player can be actively entertained with the production, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 (linear light-emitting portion 237b) arranged along the outer peripheral edge of the rear side of the touch unit 220B sends the game ball on the upper tray 201 to the ball feeding unit 540 (ball launching device 680). An upper tray ball extracting button 239 for operating the upper tray ball extracting unit 310 is arranged along the feeding guide passage portion 212a and between the guide passage portion 212a. In other words, the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is provided in the vicinity of the place where the player checks the game ball necessary for the game, and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at the position where the player cares even during the game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player notice the light emission of the linear light-emitting lens member 237, attract the player's interest to the touch unit 220B, and produce an effect by the touch unit 220B (an effect image by the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244, an effect image by the touch panel 246, etc.). touch operation, etc.) can be made easier to notice.

Further, the touch unit 220B having the upper plate liquid crystal substrate 241 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is mounted on the upper surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 of the plate unit cover 260 by the mounting base 230 and the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A. , and a waterproof seal 248 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the rear side of the touch unit 220B. Even if condensed water (water droplets) flows below the upper plate 201 (upper upper plate lower covering portion 262), it is possible to prevent the condensed water from entering the touch unit 220B. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in

In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, since the rear plate decoration substrate 235 for decorating the rear plate decoration member 236 and the linear light-emitting lens member 237 is arranged at a position higher than the bottom surface of the plate 201, Since the upper plate 201 is not exposed to water droplets condensed on the upper plate 201, the rear decorative substrate 235 of the upper plate is prevented from being short-circuited or corroded.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200, when the touch unit 220B provided with the touch panel 246 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is vibrated by the vibrating device 242, the touch unit 220B is divided into a plurality (two). Since it is attached to the unit case 231 of the mounting base unit 220A in a floating state with the damper 222 interposed therebetween, the vibration of the touch unit 220B (vibrating device 242) is absorbed and attenuated by the damper 222 and transmitted to the mounting base unit 220A. As a result, the vibration of the mounting base unit 220A can be reduced. Therefore, when the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B is touch-operated, if the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrating device 242, only the touch unit 220B vibrates. 246, and the player can enjoy the touch operation of the touch panel 246 to prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, since the touch unit 220B can be vibrated by the vibrating device 242, in addition to the operation feeling of the touch panel 246, the player is surprised by the vibration of the touch unit 220B and suggests the timing of operating the touch panel 246. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by entertaining the operation effect by the touch panel 246 of the touch unit 220B.

Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is supported from below by a plurality of dampers 222, even if the touch unit 220B is struck from above or pushed strongly and an impact or load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the dampers 222 Since the impact or the like can be absorbed, damage to the touch unit 220B, the mounting base unit 220A, or the like due to the impact or the like can be reduced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

In addition, since the portion of the touch unit 220B to be operated is the touch panel 246, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the touch panel 246 is touched for a longer time than when the player presses the button. When the touch unit 220B is vibrated by the vibrator 242 when the touch unit 246 is touched, the vibration can be reliably transmitted to the player's fingers (hands). Therefore, since the player can feel that the player is operating the touch panel 246 by vibrating the player's finger, it is possible to give a sufficient operational feeling, and the player can enjoy operating the touch panel 246. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by

In addition, by changing the image displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 of the touch unit 220B, the type of touch operation (button) can be easily changed, making it possible to respond to various effects. Diverse performances make the player less likely to get bored, thereby suppressing the decline in interest. Furthermore, since the touch unit 220B is provided with a touch panel 246, it is possible to perform touch, tap (single-tap, double-tap), drag, flick, pinch (pinch-out, pinch-in), swipe, and touch-and-touch functions compared to conventional press buttons. Various operations such as hold can be performed. As a result, it is possible to perform more diverse operation presentations, entertain the player, and prevent the player from losing interest.

Further, the touch unit 220B is attached to the mounting base unit 220A (unit case 231) so as to be immovable upward and movable downward. is pressed against the upper movement end, the touch unit 220B can be made difficult to move while the touch panel 246 is being operated, and the touch panel 246 can be operated accurately and easily. In addition, since the touch unit 220B becomes difficult to move, the player can be made to think that the touch unit 220B does not move. Vibration by the device 242 can surprise the player, amuse the player, and prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, since the touch unit 220B is vibrated by a plurality of vibration devices 242 spaced apart from each other, for example, by driving the vibration device 242 at a position close to the portion operated by the player on the touch panel 246, a strong vibration is generated. Vibration can be transmitted. Therefore, when the player operates a position different from the position to be operated on the touch panel 246, the vibration transmitted to the player is different, so that the player can be notified that the operation is wrong. is possible, the player can be made to perform correct operations, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest by enjoying the operation performance using the touch panel 246.例文帳に追加

In addition, since a plurality of vibrating devices 242 are provided that are spaced apart from each other, it is possible to generate a resonance phenomenon at an arbitrary position on the touch panel 246 by appropriately controlling the frequency, strength, etc. of the vibration of each vibrating device 242 . can be done. Therefore, by controlling each vibrating device 242 so that a resonance phenomenon occurs at an arbitrary position operated by the player, it is possible to give a further sense of operation and greatly surprise the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the touch unit 220B is hit or pushed strongly from above and an impact or load is applied to the touch unit 220B, the left and right ends of the touch unit 220B are attached to the unit case 231 with the dampers 222 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the damper 222 and the bending of the touch unit 220B can absorb (attenuate) the impact from above to some extent and transmit it to the unit case 231 side. Further, on the unit case 231 side, since the outer edge of the unit case 231 is attached to the mounting base 230 on the lower side, the shock, load, etc. from the touch unit 220B side via the unit case 231 is applied to the mounting base 230. can be widely distributed and transmitted. At this time, the outer peripheral wall of the receiving projection 231e projecting downward from the lower surface of the unit case 231 and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c into which the receiving projection 231e is inserted on the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 are formed. Since a gap is formed between the unit case 231 and the inner peripheral wall, the projecting portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other after the unit case 231 is bent downward due to the impact or load from the touch unit 220B. As a result, the shock or the like is transmitted from the unit case 231 to the mounting base 230 , and the bending of the unit case 231 further attenuates the shock or the like before it is transmitted to the mounting base 230 . Since the outer peripheral wall of the projecting portion 231e and the inner peripheral wall of the cylindrical receiving portion 230c are narrowed downward, when the projecting portion 231e and the cylindrical receiving portion 230c come into contact with each other, the projecting portion 231e (unit case) 231) side impact, load, or the like is transmitted obliquely to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230, and is transmitted in a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface of the mounting-side receiving portion 230a of the mounting base 230 and along the bottom surface. As a result, the force in the direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (downward direction) that causes the mounting base 230 to bend is reduced and transmitted to the mounting base 230 side. Therefore, even if the touch unit 220B is hit from above or is strongly pushed, the shock or the like can be effectively attenuated by the plurality of dampers 222, the unit case 231, and the mounting base 230. Damage to the mounting base unit 220A can be suppressed.

According to the pachinko machine 1, since the upper surface of the plate unit cover 260 of the plate unit 200 bulging forward under the game area 5a is provided with the touch panel 246 and the upper plate effect button 257, the game can be played within the game area 5a. A performance (operation performance) using the touch panel 246 and the top tray performance button 257 is presented to the player according to the game state that changes by hitting the ball, and the touch panel 246 and the top tray performance button 257 are presented to the player during the performance. By operating , the player can actively participate in the production, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed. Then, the upper and lower thicknesses of the lower plate opening 261 (upper plate lower covering portion 262) in the plate unit cover 260 provided with the touch panel 246 are set within the range of 15 mm to 50 mm so that the player can grasp it by hand. Due to the thickness, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the player can operate the touch panel 246 while grasping between the touch panel 246 and the upper plate lower covering part 262, and the touch panel 246 can be operated accurately. be able to.

More specifically, since the thickness between the upper surface of the touch panel 246 and the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262 is within the range of 15 mm to 50 mm, which allows the user to grasp the thickness by hand, for example, fingers other than the thumb is in contact with the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262, and the thumb is positioned above the touch panel 246, the touch panel 246 is positioned within the movement range of the thumb, and the touch panel 246 can be operated with the thumb. becomes possible. In this state, the fingers other than the thumb are in contact with the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262, so that the thumb can be stabilized, and the thumb can touch a desired position on the touch panel 246 or touch the touch panel 246. The finger can be moved in a desired direction, and the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved, so that the touch panel 246 can be operated accurately. Further, when the thumb is brought into contact with the lower surface of the upper plate lower covering portion 262, the touch panel 246 can be operated with other fingers, and the same effects as described above can be obtained. Therefore, since the touch panel 246 becomes easy to operate, the touch panel 246 can be accurately and easily operated during the performance using the touch panel 246, and the performance by the operation of the touch panel 246 amuses the player and adds interest. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Further, the touch panel 246 is provided within a range of 60 mm rearward from the front end of the dish unit cover 260, and when the touch panel 246 and the upper dish lower covering portion 262 are grasped from the front end side to operate the touch panel 246, the operation is performed. Since the touch panel 246 is arranged within the reach of the finger to be played, the touch panel 246 can be operated in a state where the finger is stabilized, and the performance using the touch panel 246 is enjoyed to prevent the player from losing interest. can do.

Furthermore, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 is inclined so as to become higher from the front side to the rear side, the surface of the touch panel 246 faces the player side and the touch panel 246 becomes easy to see, and the player operates the touch panel 246. It is possible to improve the properties and reliably achieve the above-described effects.

Further, since the upper surface of the touch panel 246 becomes higher toward the rear side, the thickness between the touch panel 246 and the upper plate lower covering portion 262 becomes thicker toward the rear side, so that the plate unit 200 becomes thicker toward the rear side. The strength and rigidity of Therefore, even if the touch panel 246 is hit from above or is strongly pressed, the touch panel 246, the plate unit cover 260, etc. can be made difficult to break, and the breakage of the touch panel 246, etc. can interrupt the game, thereby increasing the interest of the player. can be reduced.

In addition, since the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is visible from the upper side through the touch panel 246, when the player operates the touch panel 246, the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 can be used for the purpose of operating the touch panel 246. By displaying the corresponding image, the player can operate the touch panel 246 according to the content of the displayed image without knowing how to operate the touch panel 246, and the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved.

In addition, since the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 is provided, the player can be entertained by the effect image in addition to the operation effect of the touch panel 246 by displaying the effect image according to the game state. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by making it difficult for the player to get bored.

Furthermore, since the touch panel 246 is arranged in the center of the left and right, the touch panel 246 is easy to see, and the distance from both the left and right hands of the player is the same. By operating the touch panel 246 with an easy-to-use hand, the operability of the touch panel 246 can be improved. Therefore, when the performance using the touch panel 246 is performed, the touch panel 246 can be immediately visually recognized and operated, and the player can be entertained by being able to quickly respond to the operation performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can do.

In addition, a top plate effect button 257 that can be operated by the player is provided, and in addition to the touch operation by the touch panel 246, the pressing operation by the top plate effect button 257 is performed in the operation effect presented according to the game state. Therefore, various operation effects can be presented to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and losing interest in the game.

In addition, since a part (guide passage portion 212a) of the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) for storing game balls is opened upward along the rear side of the touch panel 246, for example, the guide passage of the upper plate 201 By locking fingers other than the thumb on the portion 212a and operating the touch panel 246 with the thumb, the thumb can be stabilized by the finger locked on the guiding passage portion 212a, and the operability of the touch panel 246 is improved. In addition, the touch panel 246 can be operated by grasping between the touch panel 246 and the upper plate lower covering portion 262 or locking the finger on the guide passage portion 212a. Since it is possible to stabilize the fingers and improve the operability, it is possible to select the way of placing the hands for stabilizing the fingers according to the player's habits and preferences, so that it is possible to respond to a wider variety of players. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

Next, a configuration example of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. FIG. 47 is a front view of the game board 5, FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the game board 5 viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the game board 5 viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has an outer rail 6002 and an inner rail 6003, a frame-shaped front structural member 6001 defining the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and a front structural member. A game panel 1100 arranged to close the game area 5a on the rear side of the game area 5a, a function display unit 6040 arranged below the front component member 6001 on the left side of the out port 6006 outside the game area 5a, and a game An attacker unit 2000 arranged on the right side in the left-right direction in the area 5a above the out port 6006 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and an attacker unit 2000 arranged in the right area in the game area 5a and extending vertically on the front surface of the game panel 1100. A game ball guideway unit 6010 supported by the game area 5a, a frame-like center accessory 2300 arranged in the approximate center of the game area 5a and supported by the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100. A liquid crystal as an effect display means that can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the game panel 1100 and the center accessory (frame-shaped decorative body) 2300 on the rear side of the back unit 3000 and can display a predetermined effect image. A display device 1400 is mainly provided.

The attacker unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into an opening formed in the lower right portion of the game panel 1100 and fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1100 . This attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of receiving openings that can receive game balls hit into the game area 5a. Specifically, a first starting opening 2001 that is arranged substantially in the center in the horizontal direction and from which a special lottery result can be obtained, and a rectangular big prize winning opening 2003 that is arranged on the right side of the first starting opening 2001 and extends greatly in the horizontal direction. , a general winning opening 2004 arranged on the left side of the big winning opening 2003 and the right side of the first starting opening 2001, and a second starting opening provided with a second starting opening from which a special lottery result can be obtained in the same manner as the first starting opening. A unit 2005 is provided. The second starting opening unit 2005 exists almost directly above the big winning opening 2003 .

The second starting port unit 2005 includes a normal gate 2005a, a second starting port 2005c, and a second starting port according to the normal lottery result of the normal gate, in which a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn with the passage of the game ball as a trigger. A movable piece 2005b that opens and closes, and a game ball discharge route 2005d that discharges game balls 2006a that cannot go to the second start opening 2005c after passing through the normal gate 2005a and cannot go to the second start opening 2005c toward the big winning opening. , and a game ball guide route 2005e capable of guiding the game ball to the second starting port 2005c by opening the movable piece 2005b after passing through the gate 2005a. The starting end of the second starting port unit 2005 communicates with the terminal end of the game ball guideway unit 6010 described above, and when the game ball is struck to the right and enters the game ball guideway unit 6010, it enters the game ball guideway unit 6010. to reach the second starting port unit 2005. Next, the game ball passes through the gate 2005a of the second starting port unit as it is and then reaches the movable piece 2005b. When the movable piece 2005b is open, it passes through the game ball guide route 2005e to the second starting port 2005c. When the ball enters and the movable piece 2005b is closed, it passes through the game ball discharge route 2005c and falls toward the big winning opening 2003.例文帳に追加Opening and closing of the movable piece 2005b is performed by a solenoid.

The upper side of the first starting port 2001 and the general winning port 2004 is open so that game balls can always be received. The big winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2006 capable of closing the opening. The opening/closing member 2006 is rotatably supported at its lower side, and closes the large winning opening 2003 in a substantially vertical state to make it impossible to receive a game ball. The large winning opening 2003 is opened to accept game balls. This opening/closing member 2006 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2003 is closed in a normal game state, and the game ball is accepted into the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2005c (start winning). Depending on the result of the special lottery (big win lottery) (when the result of the special lottery is "big win" or "minor win"), the attacker solenoid is driven to open and close. However, as will be described later, the opening and closing member 2006 according to this embodiment, when the result of the special lottery is "big hit (special hit)", accepts the game ball to the effective gate (described later) after the condition device is operated. It is possible to open and close by driving the attacker solenoid on the condition that there was An enable gate is a special gate to enable the object continuous actuator after the conditional device has been activated. The valid gate is prepared so that the Pachinko machine 1 has a function of delaying the timing of operating the accessory continuous operating device when a big win is won.

Next, the details of the game ball guideway unit 6000 will be described. The game ball guideway unit 6000 is made of a resin part product formed in the form of a hollow tube, and is attached to the game panel 1100 over the top and bottom on the right side of the game area 5a as described above. FIG. 50 shows the internal structure of the hollow tube by omitting the illustration of the front side portion of the game ball guideway unit 6010 . FIG. 51(a) is an enlarged view of the game ball guideway unit 6010 of FIG. 50, and FIG. 51(b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the game ball guideway unit 6010. FIG.

The starting end 6010a of the game ball guideway unit 6010 is configured to be open at the upper right part of the game area, and is hit to the right and bounced off the reflector 6010b to flow down the right side of the game area. All of the balls are fed into the game ball guideway unit 6010 from the open end 6010a. A front half region of a predetermined width following the starting end 6010a of the game ball guideway unit 6010 is formed of a straight portion 6010c that is substantially straight and a curved portion 6010d that follows. A performance gate 6011 is formed at the end of the straight portion 6010c and the beginning of the curved portion 6010d. When the game ball passes through the production gate 6011, the passing information of the game ball is supplied to the peripheral control board (or the main control board), and the peripheral control board, triggered by the passage of the game ball through the production gate 6011, hits the game ball to the right. Predetermined effect information of the effect device including the liquid crystal display device 1400 is formed in the activated game state. The game ball that has passed through the performance gate 6011 is guided to the straight portion 6010e after passing through the bent portion 6010d while reciprocating in the left and right direction. The bending portion 6010c bends the progression of the game ball, thereby reducing the falling speed of the game ball.

A straight portion 6010e following the bent portion 6010c of the game ball guideway unit is formed in a straight line that descends substantially vertically with a relatively long width. As shown in FIG. 51(b), on the front side 6010f of the game ball guideway unit in this straight portion 6010e, a plurality of convex bodies 6010h with hemispherical cross-sections are provided, projecting toward the rear side 6010g. , and a convex body 6010h that protrudes from the rear surface portion toward the front surface portion is provided. Since the convex bodies on the front side 6010f and the convex bodies on the rear side 6010g are formed in a zigzag pattern, the gaming machine ball 6010i flowing down the straight part 6010e consists of a plurality of convex bodies arranged in a zigzag pattern. The falling speed of the game ball is moderated because the game balls come into contact with each other in order and advance while curving back and forth. The height of the convex body 6010h in the front-rear direction is set within a range that does not impair the progress of the game ball passing through the game ball guideway unit. Incidentally, in order to adjust the falling speed of the game ball, the width of some convex bodies in the direction in which the game ball advances may be increased as indicated by reference numeral 6010j. The linear portion 6010e is formed linearly without being bent like the bent portion 6010d in order to avoid the human head type movable accessory.

A bulging portion 6010k following the linear portion 6010e is formed in the lower area of the game ball guideway unit 6010 in the game area. An internal tube 6010m is formed in the bulging portion 6010k, and the internal tube 6010m communicates with the second starting port unit 2000 described above. The starting end of the internal tube 6010m is provided with the already-described effective gate 6010n, and the game ball that advances while falling in the straight part 6010e goes straight to the internal tube 6010m, and after passing through the effective gate 6010n, the second start The mouth unit 2000 is reached. A game ball passing through the game ball guideway unit 6000 is particularly slowed down in the process of passing through the bent portion 6010d and the straight portion 6010e. Therefore, as compared with the case where the game ball freely falls without being slowed down, it is possible to gain time from when the game ball passes through the performance gate 6011 to when it passes through the effective gate 6010n. Accordingly, the peripheral control board can have a margin of time for the effect on the liquid crystal display device or the like, so that an effective effect can be provided to the player. The details of this will be described later. Incidentally, the normal gate 2005a, the performance gate 6011, and the effective gate 6010n are provided with gate switches (gate sensors) for detecting passage of game balls.

The center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into a large opening that penetrates the approximate center of the game panel 1100, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1100, as shown in FIG. , etc., it is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 5a. As shown in FIG. 52, a movable logo accessory 6200 imitating a logo is provided above the center accessory 2300 so as to be tiltable counterclockwise toward the center of the game board with the right side as the center in a front view. Also, as shown in FIG. 53, on the right side of the center role 2300, a movable zombie role 6201 imitating the head of a person (zombie) is arranged linearly from the right side of the game board 1100 toward the center when viewed from the front. As shown in the same FIG. 53, a rectangular movable accessory 6202 is provided on the left side of the center accessory so as to be reciprocally tiltable clockwise around the lower side. The peripheral control board controls the movable mode of the movable accessory according to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 49, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100. The back box 3001 mainly supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position separated from the game panel 1100 rearward by a predetermined distance. Then, in the back box 3001, a shutter-type movable accessory (to be described later) arranged in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a falling movable accessory (to be described later) imitating a claw that can drop in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. configured with. A board holder 6023 is fixed below the back box 3001 . The board board holder 623 is provided with a main control board box 6024 for housing a main control board for controlling game operations on its back surface. A peripheral board box 6022 for housing a peripheral control board is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 .

As shown in FIG. 54, the shutter type movable accessory 6301 is composed of an upper shutter body 6302 and a lower shutter body 6303 . The upper shutter body 6302 is supported by the back box 3001 so as to be able to move forward and backward between the upper rear surface of the center accessory 2300 and the central part of the liquid crystal display device 1400 at the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the lower shutter body 6203 body is supported by the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is supported so as to be able to move forward and backward between the center part of the liquid crystal display device and the back side of the lower part of the center accessory. The peripheral control board moves the upper shutter body 6020 and the lower shutter body 6203 separately or simultaneously according to the game state, and the upper shutter body 6202 and the lower shutter body 6203 are combined in front of the image 1400a of the liquid crystal display device 1400. forming an integrated shutter body.

As shown in FIG. 60, the falling movable accessory 6250 suddenly falls over a relatively large width from the upper non-open area of the game panel 1100 to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 . Therefore, in the gaming machine, when the player's attention is directed to the above-described upper tray liquid crystal display device 244 (touch panel 246), the player's attention and viewpoint are displayed on the liquid crystal display on the side of the game board 1100 (the side of the game area 5a). It can be directed at the device. Next, details of the falling movable accessory 6250 will be described. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the movable falling accessory seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the falling accessory seen from the back, and FIG. 56 is an exploded perspective view of the falling accessory seen from the front. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the falling accessory viewed from the back, FIG. 58 is a front view showing the first action of the falling accessory, and FIG. 59 is the second action of the falling movable accessory. It is a front view which shows operation|movement.

The falling movable accessory includes a falling body 6250a imitating a claw, an arm body 6250b that supports the falling body, and a folder 6250c that supports the base 6251 of the arm body 6250b and controls the falling behavior of the falling body 6250a. configured as follows. The folder 6250c is fixed to the back box 3001 so as to come behind the center accessory 2300 on the right side of the game area 5a.

The folder 6250c is configured such that a drive mechanism 6250f of the arm body 6250b is accommodated by a front cover 6250d and a rear cover 6253e. The drive mechanism 6250f includes a cam 6251f that contacts the bottom surface 6250e of the tapered portion of the base 6251, a first motor 6250g that rotates the cam 6251f, a first rail 6250h that guides the vertical movement of the base 6251, and , a second rail 6250i, a rack 6250j that moves up and down along the second rail 6250i, a pinion 6250k that meshes with the rack 6250j to move the rack 6250j up and down, and a second motor 6250m for rotating the pinion. and has. The first rail 6250h is formed at approximately half the height of the folder 6250c, and the lower end of the first rail 6250h is fitted into and supported by ribs 6250r on the inner surface of the rear cover 6253e. When the falling body 6250a descends, the lower end of the base portion 6251 abuts against the rib 6250r, thereby restricting the lowest position of the falling body 6250a to substantially the center of the folder.

As shown in FIG. 58, when the cam 6251f is in contact with the tapered portion 6250e of the base portion 6251 and the tapered portion 6250e is supported by the maximum diameter of the cam 6251f (FIG. 58(a)), the falling object 6250a is It is supported at its uppermost position. When the cam 6251f reciprocates clockwise within a small angle range by the first motor 6250g, the contact position between the cam 6251f and the bottom surface of the tapered portion 6250e slightly moves up and down as shown in FIG. Along with this, the falling body 6250a also moves up and down so as to be slightly exposed from the upper end position of the center accessory 2300, as indicated by the dashed line. On the other hand, when the rotation angle of the cam 6251f increases and the engagement state between the cam 6251f and the bottom surface 6250e of the tapered portion is finally released, the falling body 6250a freely falls and falls from the back side 2300 of the center accessory to the liquid crystal display device 1400. (Fig. 59(a), Fig. 60).

From this state, when the second motor 6250m rotates the pinion 6250k to raise the rack 6250j (FIG. 59(b)), the dropped body 6250a is also raised by being pushed by the rack 6250j. After the falling body 6250a is raised to the highest position, the first motor 6250g rotates the cam 6251f until it abuts against the bottom surface 6250e of the tapered portion, whereby the falling body 6250a is supported by the cam 6251f and returns to the highest position. Next, the second motor 6250m reversely rotates the pinion 6250k to lower the rack 6250j to the lowest position. Unlike the first rail 6250h, the second rail 6250i is formed to have a length substantially equal to the vertical length of the folder 6250c in order to guide the vertical movement of the rack. The position of the cam 6251 and the position of the rack 6250j are detected by photosensors 6250p and 6250q, and the peripheral control board detects the rotational positions of the first motor 6250g and the second motor 6250m according to the outputs from the photosensors. to control.

Next, the control board for performing various controls of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 66. FIG. FIG. 61 is a block diagram of the main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board, FIG. 62 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 61, and FIG. FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 61, and FIG. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 66 is a block diagram around a VDP with built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and sound control section.

As shown in FIG. 61, the control configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110 and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, followed by the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board.

As shown in FIG. 61, the main control board 4100, which controls the progress of the game, controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and executes the game operation after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on. A main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs such as a main control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., and detection signals from various detection switches are input. a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids for movable accessories, etc. and a blackout monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring signs of voltage blackout or momentary blackout.

The main control MPU 4100a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a to identify the individual (the only code that exists in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 4100b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND). A main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function having a reset terminal provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 4100cb having no reset terminal and not having a reset function. and consists of The main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

First start port 2001, start port switch 3022 for detecting game balls that enter the second start port 2005c (collectively referred to as the first start port switch and the second start port switch), and the general winning port 2104 The detection signal from the general prize winning port switch 3020 that detects the game ball entered and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b. It is In addition, a gate switch 2352 for detecting game balls that have passed through the normal gate 2005a and the valid gate 6010n (collectively referring to each switch), a count switch 2110 for detecting game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2003, and , The detection signal from the magnetism detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 to detect cheating using a magnet is sent to the main control input circuit 4100b via the panel relay terminal board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 4100b. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the control MPU 4100a.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 4100ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a drive signal is sent from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the starting solenoid (movable piece 2005b driving solenoid) 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function is connected to the panel relay terminal board 4161 and then the function display board 1191. Through the first special symbol display device 1185, second special symbol display device 1186, first special symbol storage display device 1184, second special symbol storage display device 1187, normal symbol display device 1189, normal symbol memory display device 1188, A driving signal is output to the game state indicator 1183 and the round indicator 1190 .

Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function, the main control output with the reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

In the present embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the starter switch 3022, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110, whereas the general winning switch 3020 , a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2005c, and frequently passes through the gate, so the game ball is frequently detected by the starting port switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352. occurs in For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the starting switch 3022 and the gate switch 2352 . In addition, when a big win game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2003 is opened and game balls enter frequently, so detection of game balls by the count switch 2110 also occurs frequently. For this reason, the count switch 2110 also uses a long-life proximity switch. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switch 3020 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 in which game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning port switch 3020 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the board 4110 as serial data. When the payout control board 4110 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, it outputs to the main control board 4100 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data at the main control input circuit 4100b, and the main control input circuit 4100b sends the command to the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, it sends a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. A signal (primary payment ACK signal) is output to the payout control board 4110 from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko game machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function. As a result, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb to the peripheral control board 4140 .

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is composed mainly of a main control CPU core 4100aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of the main control serial I/O ports, etc., are connected to the bus 4100ah. (see FIG. 71). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, etc. (Fig. 71). The main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec after setting multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ) and BC0 (see FIG. 67). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off during the power cut-off process. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, when an operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a Is output from the payout control board 4110, through the main control input circuit 4100b, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU4100a, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU4100a (cleared).

As shown in FIG. 62, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls includes a payout control unit 4120 for performing various controls relating to payout, an operation switch 860a for performing various functions, and a state of the pachinko game machine 1. and an error LED indicator 860b for displaying. In addition, the operation switch 860a, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, controls the RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output by being operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

As shown in FIG. 62, a payout control unit 4120, which performs various controls related to payout, controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 4120a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 4120b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 4120c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744, CR A CR unit input/output circuit 4120e for exchanging various signals with the unit 6 is provided. The payout control MPU 4120a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). It also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control program transmits various information (game information) on the game and various commands on payout from the main control board 4100 as payout serial data transmission signals via the payout control I/O port 4120b. Receive serial data in serial fashion. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the game ball payout operation, and operates the operation switch 860a as an error cancellation unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error cancellation navigation commands are sent as serial data to the payer. As a signal, serial data is output to the reception port of the main control board 4100 via the payout control I/O port 4120b (command transmission means). In addition, this payout control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and payout control is started, the payout When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 860a, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618. , when a detection signal (body frame open detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame open command (first body frame open command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When the body frame open switch 619 receives a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation, it outputs a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command).

The payout control input circuit 4120b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the payout control input circuit 4120b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 4120b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals are input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. A payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function. and consists of The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs a signal based on it from its various output terminals.

Detection signals from a ball cutoff switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of game balls in the supply passage of the prize ball device and a count switch 751 for detecting game balls flowing down the prize ball passage of the prize ball device are first detected by the prize ball device. and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit formed in the rotation detection board of the prize ball device is first sent to the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device, then to the board inside the prize ball case, and then to the payout control input. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the circuit 4120b.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame with respect to the main body frame and the main body frame open switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame are supplied to the payout control input circuit 4120b. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the MPU 4120a.

Also, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is first input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the handle relay terminal board 192, the power supply board 851, and the payout control input circuit 4120b.

The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b in the form of serial data at the input terminal of the serial input port, or receives an operation signal (detection command) of the operation switch 860a. signal) is output to the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b. When the payout control MPU 4120a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 4120ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 4100 from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 4120a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko game machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the main control board 4100 from the control output circuit 4120cb. When the main control board 4100 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 4110 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control input circuit 4120b.

In addition, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. A drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit, and the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit to the payout motor via the substrate in the prize ball case, and the pachinko game machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for displaying the state on the error LED indicator 860b to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b. do.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and An error has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is "ball caught" (specifically Based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, the payout rotor and the game ball are engaged near the entrance, and the payout rotor is difficult to rotate. ), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, a problem has occurred in the counting switch 751 based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751). ), and when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit value). When the number "6" is displayed, it is notified that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls stored based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550). Then, when the number "7" is displayed, it informs that it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off in any one of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates that it is "stocked (with prize balls stocked (not paid out))" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number are notified).

In addition, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. , the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 4100 to the external terminal board via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in, not shown). The number of game balls, etc. and various information (game information, contents of errors related to the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall. The external terminal board and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. is designed not to malfunction or break down, and the main control board 4100 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board of the pachinko game machine 1 and the payout control board 4110 that controls payout etc. It is designed to prevent malfunction or failure due to application of an excessive voltage. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko game machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending switch 365a and a prepaid card return request signal from the return switch 365b are first sent to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. 869 to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the input/output circuit 4120e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining degree indicator 365c. The signal is output to the rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c. In addition, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the remaining number indicator 365c through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. there is

In addition, the power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 67) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. there is Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is transmitted through the payout control input circuit 4120b to the payout control MPU 4120a. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 4120a judges it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb, and is also output to the main control board 4100 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb.

Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control section 4120 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 63, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the degree display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 4110, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 is electrically connected to the substrate, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness). AC 24 V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 851 to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board 869 for renting equipment such as game balls. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage generating circuit (not shown), and generates the voltage together with the ground LG. , to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 , and to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . .

A power display board 365 is mounted with a switch 365a and a return switch 365b, and a remaining power display 365c, which is a segment display.

The ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 . When the return button 362 is pressed, the return switch 365b is turned on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 .

The remaining power indicator 365c is composed of three segment indicators arranged in a row. Of these three-digit segment indicators, the segment indicators are sequentially driven one by one. The lighting of the segment display is controlled. With such lighting control, the remaining credits indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or an error of the CR unit 6. FIG. The remaining number indicator 365c includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a 1-digit segment display out of 3-digit segment displays, and the designated 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed, are connected from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the main door relay terminal plate 880, the one-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated in accordance with the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays can be visually recognized through the remaining loan display portion 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the power display plate 365 adjacent to the remaining power display 365c. A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365 d via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880 . A predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lendable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 with a built-in voltage creation circuit, and when the ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball lending state controls the logic of the ball lendable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining number indicator 365c through the current limiting resistor mounted on the terminal board 869 for connecting the game ball lending device.

In the CR unit 6, when the ball rental button is pressed, the ball rental operation signal TDS from the ball rental switch 365a is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. to output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board for connecting the game ball lending device PRDY, which is a signal to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or not possible. 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that game balls worth 200 yen are paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. is performed twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen will be paid out, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 362 is pressed, the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount after subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball rental button 361 .

Next, the power supply board 851 will be briefly described. The power board 851 includes a power switch 852 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts AC (24 V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power control unit 855 that generates various power sources. , a shooting control unit that performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid of the hitting ball shooting device and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid.

The power control unit 855 operates a synchronous rectification circuit 855a that rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility by operating the power switch 852, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 855a. A power factor improvement circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improvement circuit 855b, and various direct currents for supplying to various substrates from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 855c. and a power generation circuit 855d for generating power.

The firing control section 857, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid and ball feeding control by ball feeding, mainly includes a firing control circuit 857a. The launch control circuit 857a includes an operation signal from a potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the intensity of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a (shooting intensity), and a touch switch 516 that detects whether the palm or fingers are in contact. A detection signal from and a detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not to forcibly stop the launching (shooting) of the game ball by the player's will, through the handle relay terminal plate 192, is entered. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 857a, a CR connection signal is input via the payout control board 4110 to notify that effect. .

The launch control circuit 857a adjusts the drive current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 654.

The peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIG. While performing drawing control and detecting and controlling the contact state of the touch panel 246, the liquid crystal and A sound control unit 4160, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, and a main body frame A volume adjustment volume for adjusting the volume of music, sound effects, etc., played from the speaker housed in the speaker box and the speaker provided on the door frame, by rotating a knob.

As shown in FIG. 64, the peripheral control unit 4150, which performs performance control, controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time the V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, light emission of various LEDs, etc. A peripheral control RAM 4150c that stores information for managing schedule data that defines the mode, etc., and various information that continues over the course of the day peripheral control SRAM 4150d for storing peripheral control SRAM 4150d (information for managing such effect flags, etc.), and peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT4150e"). In addition, the peripheral control unit 4150 receives the information on the passage of the game ball by the switch of the production gate 6011 and the input information on the operation of the production operation means such as the production button 257, and controls the production operation.

The peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time during which the power is immediately restored after an instantaneous power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 4150d loses its contents. , the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko game machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. It loses its contents as it can no longer be held.

The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a fixed period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decoration board of the game board 4 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are sent to the motor drive board serial The door-side motor drive data for transmitting to the motor drive board 4180 from the I/O port via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting the drive signal to the electric drive source such as the dial drive motor provided on the door frame. Signals are sent from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board, and the peripheral door relay terminal board, or to each door frame decoration board. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of provided LEDs is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED to the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the board and the peripheral door relay terminal board.

Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotating direction) of the dial operation portion and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting operation of the press operation portion provided in the operation unit 400. is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration driving amplifier board, and this serialized operation unit detection data is sent from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate. , and is input to the operation unit detection serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies (movable accessories) provided on the game board 5, and gate switches of the production gate 6011 A detection signal from a push switch such as a production button is serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 or the like, and this serialized detection data is sent to the game board side serial It is input from the transmission circuit to the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, the peripheral control MPU 4150a comprises a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I/O controllers. /O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah. Various data are read from and written to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h. Various data are read and written via an internal bus 4150ah, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and an external bus 4150h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d. /O port 4150ag and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built into the peripheral control MPU 4150a, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 4150ae built into the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, to transfer data independently. 4150ah, peripheral control serial I/O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag, and It reads and writes from/to an input/output device such as a peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak via a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and a peripheral bus 4150ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I/O devices built into the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Between input/output devices such as O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h. I/O devices such as serial I/O port 4150ae, WDT 4150af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I/O port 4150ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak are connected via peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150ai. read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, input/output devices such as peripheral control serial I/O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control various serial I/O ports 4150ae are serial I/O port for lamp drive board, serial I/O port for motor drive board, serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, serial I/O port for main control board, and serial I/O port for acquisition of operation unit information.

A peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer, and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the WDT 4150af with built-in peripheral control, it is reset. will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the WDT 4150af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period, it can restart the timer count, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. output a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and the upper decoration on the door frame 5 It outputs a lighting signal for an LED mounted on the upper decoration board of the unit. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big win game state is confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 4150ag can be shortened. Therefore, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs except for this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter is electrically connected to the volume control volume, and the resistance value is varied by turning the knob of the volume control volume, and divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob. The applied voltage is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the body frame 3 and the door frame are provided. Music and sound effects are played from the speakers. In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying pachinko game machine 1 clerk or the like of the occurrence of malfunctions of the pachinko game machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko game machine 1, content related to game performance, etc. (For example, the screen unfolding on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is produced as a more powerful one, or the player is notified that there is a high possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state, etc.). ) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame 5, but the notification sound and notification sound are completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. It is designed so that the volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source to be described later) by a program from mute to maximum volume. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume to set the volume to a low level, the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the body frame and the door frame are provided with the speaker. Although the performance sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 are reduced, when a problem occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 or when the player is cheating, the volume is increased volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolding on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 can be made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state can shift to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them of high prices.

The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music data. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects, etc., and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The schedule data for screen generation is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the tray side liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. It is The schedule data for generating the light emission mode is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed. Some are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are also read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, which will be described later. In some cases, what is copied in is read out.

In addition, in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is stored. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects the reduction in luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 due to aging when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is of the LED type. , the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. to correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 that has been set. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the luminance When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is lit, the brightness is 80% obtained by adding 5%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the backlight is turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the liquid crystal display device on the game board side is displayed. When lighting the backlight of 1400, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by adding 10%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted and turned on.

As shown in FIG. 65, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusive storage of copies of various information stored in this backup managed work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy area 4150cd for exclusively storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and copies of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control data copy areas 4150ce for dedicated storage, a backup unmanaged work area 4150cf for dedicated storage of various types of information updated by execution of various control programs that are not backed up, is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf to clear it to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the first backup area 4150cb, and the second backup area 4150cc, when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, a power-on command from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect and starts each state effect. (For example, when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 61 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on), it is cleared to zero. be.

The backup management target work area 4150ca is performance information (which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time a V blank signal is input from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later). 1fr) for exclusive use as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. and Bank0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150 cc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, "(1fr)" is set when the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a A V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" (effect information (1fr) and effect The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same sense.) As will be described later, "(1ms)" means that the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. Bank 0", "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4. is set, and in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting to the plurality of LEDs, etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 are stored. This is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the signal is set. In the received command storage area 4150cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad is a storage area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a described later) is set. is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy area 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable object information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. It is Door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, which is a storage area to be set, a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 is stored. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position of the movable body, the movable position, etc., is set. Rotation (direction of rotation) of the operation unit and various information obtained by operation of the pressing operation unit (for example, rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the operation unit history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in Bank 0 (1fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf in Bank 0 (1ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa when the peripheral controller steady-state processing described later is executed. , When the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, and the peripheral control unit steady-state Each time the process is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control unit steady process, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. be. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the previous peripheral controller steady-state processing was executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It's becoming

In the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the door is added to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is stored in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 4150caf for the frame decoration driving amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It's like

Next, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc dedicated to storing copies of performance information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the first backup area 4150cb and the second backup area 4150cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Effect information (1 ms), which is copied at high speed to the first backup area 4150cb and the second backup area 4150cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. , as effect backup information (1 ms), is transferred to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 4150cb, Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are set as one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is changed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. This page is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the second backup area 4150cc, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is changed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and consistency of this page is performed by checking whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

Thus, in this embodiment, in the first backup area 4150cb, one pair is Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr), and one pair is Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). The backup second area 4150cc is an area for managing pages, and the backup second area 4150cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 4150cb and the second backup area 4150cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as performance backup information (1fr) by the peripheral control unit every 1 frame. Each time a routine process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to the first backup area 4150cb and the second backup area 4150cc, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. is backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed as backup backup information (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac executes high-speed copying by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in common. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (common program execution).

A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are such that when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the power-on command from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect and each (For example, when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 61 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on) When instructing the start of the effect is not cleared to zero either. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cb, and backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. It is designed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state, etc.) ) can be cleared, but the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

The backup management target work area 4150da includes performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of a big hit game state and for managing a special performance flag). information, etc.) to be backed up. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly explained. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a first backup area 4150db to a second backup area 4150dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is for backing up various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. , and “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used in the same sense).

Next, a backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc dedicated to storing copies of performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The first backup area 4150db and the second backup area 4150dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Then, it is copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) form a pair, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are paired, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first backup area 4150db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page. 4150dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 4150db and the second backup area 4150dc.

Drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame are performed. As shown in FIG. 64, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 has a built-in sound source (hereinafter referred to as "internal sound source") for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects, and the liquid crystal on the game board side. A sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4160a that controls drawing of the display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, and screens displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data, and audio for transmitting serialized music, sound effects and the like as audio data to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194. and a data transmission IC 4160c. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b stores sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and for displaying an operation menu background image, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, volume adjustment icon to be described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, body frame back image data used to display the body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the body frame 3 to be visually recognized from the player's point of view, display of the service mode screen Service mode screen image data used for , break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the rest timer setting screen, and during rest screen image data used for displaying the during rest screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b also stores suggestive display object image data used to display a suggestive display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section (operation section) of the operation unit.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After extracting from the control data copy area 4150ce and outputting to the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator, when a V blank signal to be described later is input as a trigger, the first screen data is extracted according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The following screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, stores the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data each time the V blank signal is input. Then, the screen data are output one by one from the first screen data to the VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a copies the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. It is extracted and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After extracting from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and outputting them to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source, when the V blank signal is input, the leading data is extracted according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from peripheral control ROM 4150b of peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy area 4150ce of peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to VDP 4160a with built-in tone generator. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one from the top sound command data.

When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the built-in tone generator described above, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source 4160b, based on the input screen data, outputs the game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. The side character data and the upper dish side character data are extracted, sprite data is created, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated. A built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "internal VRAM") for The VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also outputs the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 to the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244. Synchronization between the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 is achieved by outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 . In addition, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source receives a detection signal corresponding to the contact state of the contact surface of the touch panel 246, and upon receiving the detection signal, outputs the detection signal to the peripheral control MPU 4140a. contact state can be grasped. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to create sprite data for one screen (1 image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 out of the generated drawing data is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 from the channel CH1, and the upper plate side Image data for the liquid crystal display device 244 is output to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 from the channel CH2. In other words, "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 is stored in the built-in VRAM. It is the data for generating above.

In addition, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and outputs image data for the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 from channel CH2. After outputting to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 244, a V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a to notify that it is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, the V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V-blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 . In addition, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the tone generator built-in VDP 4160a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" is a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) that retains drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the liquid crystal display device 1400 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper tray side. , the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 .

In addition, when the above-described sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on the command from the main control board 4100, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source 4160b, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 and the fraudulent act on the pachinko game machine 1 A subvolume value is incorporated that adjusts the . Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 and shifting to a later-described setting mode.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 are amplified to a master volume value, which is the sound volume, and the amplified performance sound is serialized to be audio data. It is designed to output to the data transmission IC 4160c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value and stored in the speaker box provided in the main body frame. It is set so that the volume of the sound emitted from the speaker installed on the door frame and the speaker installed on the door frame is the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used The set volume control volume 4140a is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually housed in the speaker box provided in the body frame. Amplify to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker and the speaker provided on the door frame, serialize this amplified effect sound and output it to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data. The sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track and the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the informative sound incorporated in the track to be used. A master volume that synthesizes the maximum volume and the volume of the synthesized notification sound and becomes the volume that actually flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame. and serializes the amplified notification sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

Here, when the production sound is played from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame, the occurrence of malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 and fraudulent acts on the pachinko game machine 1 are prevented. To give a brief explanation of the control for playing the notification sound to notify the store clerk, etc., first, the sub volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound of the track in which this sound effect is incorporated data, a sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the informational sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume, and this synthesized effect sound The volume of and the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to the master volume value, which is the volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame, and this amplified production sound and The notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

In other words, the sound emitted from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame is actually only the notification sound with the maximum volume. At this time, since the sound effect is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame, but the sound effect progresses according to the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation. are doing. In this embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame for a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute until now is changed again to the sub-volume value of the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. is set (at this time, if the adjustment is made by shifting to the setting mode by operating the dial operation part or the pressing operation part of the operation unit, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), The sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame.

In this way, when the performance sound is played from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame, the pachinko game machine 1 malfunctions and fraudulent acts on the pachinko game machine 1 are prevented. When the notification sound is played to notify the staff in the hall, etc., the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is emitted from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame. Since the muted production sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation, the notification sound is emitted from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the effect sound disappears, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point at which the informational sound started playing, but starts playing again from the point where it progressed according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the informational sound started playing. there is

The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b stores, as shown in FIG. are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, effect sound, notification sound, notification sound, etc. are also stored in advance.

Audio data transmission IC 4160c receives serialized audio data from VDP 4160a with a built-in tone generator, and transmits the right audio data to frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, the speakers housed in the speaker box provided on the body frame and the speakers provided on the door frame reproduce music, sound effects, and the like in stereo in accordance with various presentations.

The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194, for example, the plus signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are synthesized on the frame-decorated drive amplifier board to form one left-side audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

As shown in FIG. 64, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko game machine 1) without being supplied with power at all from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko game machine 1). As a result, even if power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. The game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the tray side liquid crystal display device 244 can unfold the effect based on the game. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree and reindeer will be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, and on New Year's Eve, a New Year countdown will be displayed. For example, a screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the tray side liquid crystal display device 244, and the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is equipped with an LED type backlight. there is The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is of the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and brightness adjustment information for the currently set game. and the brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the board-side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 244 .

In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date and hour, minute, and second first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs ON/OFF control of the backlight or only ON when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 is of the cold cathode tube type. It is designed to

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set on the production line of the game machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 on the production line, the input date and time information is entered on the production line as the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is of the LED type. , the information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko game machine 1 (eg, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability) can be stored.

In addition, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. or too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation part or the pressing operation part of the operation unit, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation part or the pressing operation part of the operation unit is operated within a predetermined time after turning on the power of the pachinko game machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. When the dial operation section or the pressing operation section of the operation unit is operated while the customer is waiting and the demonstration is being performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. It is designed to be displayed on the display device 1400 . By operating the dial operation part and the pressing operation part of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 can be adjusted to the desired brightness. can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described luminance correction program, so that if the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the game board side liquid crystal A decrease in brightness due to aging of the display device 1400 is corrected. Peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, and uses calendar information and time to specify the year, month, and day. Acquire time information specifying minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, and adjust the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the currently set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

For example, based on the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 was first turned on, Acquire the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on, this 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness of 80% is obtained by adding 5% which is the correction information acquired for If 12 months have already passed since the first power-on of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is turned on, the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75% to obtain 85%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted and turned on so as to achieve the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165 aa of the RTC control unit 4165 . Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition processing of the control unit power-on processing, and time The current date and time may be specified by acquiring the current time information set in the information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 .

As described above, the volume adjustment volume adjusts the volume of music, sound effects, etc. played from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame by rotating the knob. You can do it. As described above, the sound volume control volume is adapted to vary its resistance value by rotating the knob portion thereof, and the peripheral control A/D converter 4150ak electrically connected is controlled by the rotation of the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music is played from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the body frame and the speaker provided in the door frame. and sound effects.

In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko game machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko game machine 1, Notify the contents of the game performance (for example, make the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 more powerful, or notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state for the player) etc.) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame. The volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) by program from mute to maximum volume.

The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like turns the knob portion of the volume control volume to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door frame accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame can Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects emitted from the speakers are reduced, the volume is increased (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 can be made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume control volume, the dial operation portion and pressing operation portion of the operation unit can be adjusted. By operating it, you can move to setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation part or the pressing operation part of the operation unit is operated within a predetermined time after turning on the power of the pachinko game machine 1, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. When the dial operation section or the pressing operation section of the operation unit is operated while the customer is waiting and the demonstration is being performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. It is designed to be displayed on the display device 1400 . The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation section and the pressing operation section of the operation unit according to the setting mode screen. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 4150akZ converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume control volume from an analog value to a digital value. The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section or pressing operation section of the operation unit. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data such as music, sound effects, etc. is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume, and when the dial operation portion or pressing operation portion of the operation unit is operated, There are two ways to adjust the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the substrate volume value by adding or subtracting a predetermined value. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the body frame must always be left open from the outer frame. Then, the person who can rotate the knob of the volume control volume is the store clerk in the hall. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find the music and sound effects to be too soft and difficult to hear, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effects loud. Therefore, within a predetermined period of time after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation part or the pressing operation part of the operation unit is operated, or the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is put into a customer waiting state and a demonstration is performed. When the dial operation part or the pressing operation part of the operation unit is operated within the period of time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, and the operation is performed according to the screen of this setting mode. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation part and the pressing operation part of the unit. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, if the hall clerk feels that the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is too low to hear the music and sound effects, he or she can dial the operation unit. It is possible to increase the volume to a desired level by operating the operation unit or the pressing operation unit. It is possible to reduce the volume to a desired volume by operating the pressing operation portion.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is kept in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and becomes a customer waiting state, the demonstration by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). ), the volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time is cancelled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko game machine 1 last time felt that the adjusted volume was too low and it was difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the player could sit in front of the pachinko game machine 1 this time. A player who sits down and plays a game can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation part and the pressing operation part of the operation unit, and the player sat in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and played a game. If the player feels that the adjusted volume is loud and the music and sound effects are loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can adjust the dial operation part and the press operation part of the operation unit. can be operated to reduce the volume to the desired level.

Next, the power supply system of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. FIG. 67 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko game machine, and FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power substrate 851 and are the same ground (GND).

The power board is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be powered on.

The power board includes a power control section 855 and a firing control section 857, as shown in FIG. The power control unit 855 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts AC (24 V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The part is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid of the batted ball launcher and the ball feeding unit ball feeding solenoid.

The power control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power factor improvement circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, a power generation circuit 855d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 through the power supply board 851, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 855a. This synchronous rectification circuit 855a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 855b. The power factor correction circuit 855b improves the power factor of the rectified power to produce DC +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 855c. This smoothing circuit 855c removes the supplied +37V ripple, smoothes the +37V, and supplies it to the firing control circuit 857a and the power generating circuit 855d of the firing control section 857, respectively.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in main control MPU4100a of main control board 4100, capacitor BC1 is built into payout control MPU4120a of payout control section 4120 in payout control board 4110 It supplies backup power to the RAM (withdrawal control built-in RAM).

A shooting control circuit 857a of the shooting control unit 857 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a driving power source, and launches the game ball toward the game area 5a with a launching strength (launching strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body. While adjusting the drive current for (shooting) and controlling the output to the firing solenoid, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid of the ball feeding unit, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit is the upper plate of the plate unit. receives one of the game balls stored in the ball feeding member, and performs control for feeding the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the side of the hitting ball launching device.

The power source generation circuit 855d supplies from the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c to +5V DC (+5V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), +12V DC (+12V DC, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. A power system to which +5V is applied and supplied is a +5V power line, a power system to which +12V is applied and supplied is a +12V power line, and a power system to which +24V is applied and supplied is a +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power generation circuit 855d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as described later. +5V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4120a through the payout control filter circuit 4110a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power generation circuit 855d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. This +5V creation circuit 4100g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, from +12V from the payout control board 4110. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 4100g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control filter circuit 4100h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM through the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and payout control It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 on the substrate 4110. FIG. In other words, the +5V generated by the power generation circuit of the power supply board flows a current toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward due to the diode PD0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1. , the current flows in the direction of Thus, +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit of the power supply board is returned to the payout control board 4110 and then from the payout control board 4110 again to the power supply board. can be recharged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power generation circuit is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as payout VBB. Although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate. It's like

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. In addition to being connected, it is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 on the main control board 4100 . In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 4100g flows through the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and is forwarded by the diode MD0 to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. A current flows in the direction of Thus, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 4100g is supplied from the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board. It is possible to do so. As a result, the +12V generated by the power generation circuit of the power supply board 851 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the +5V generation circuit 4100g cannot generate +5V. In this case, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. Therefore, the diode MD0 is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. Although the main control MPU 4100a does not operate because the current is prevented from flowing by the main control MPU 4100a, the storage contents are retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

Next, the outline about the voltage supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board are demonstrated.

Three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power supply generation circuit of the power supply board are supplied to the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. Two types of voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 . The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power source generation circuit of the power supply board are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate, and are supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 and the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate. They are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal boards.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are applied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decoration boards of the game board 4, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs the game It outputs a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a panel motor or solenoid.

The peripheral control board 4140 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 4140b that generates DC 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board. there is The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 4140b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal module 470a of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, and the touch panel module 480a of the touch panel 246, respectively. . The +12 V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 is also supplied to the backlight power supply 1900b of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the backlight power supply 470b of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, respectively.

On the other hand, the three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate are supplied to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 68(b). The frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 has a +9V generating circuit 194a that generates DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a and +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the like.

As shown in FIG. 67, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120, for example. +12V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 4110. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko game machine 1, game information of the pachinko game machine 1, etc. to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is a circuit that The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko game machine 1, game information of the pachinko game machine 1, etc., from signals output from the external communication circuit 784a. . In addition, +24 from the power board 851 is supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 without being used in the payout control board 4110 at all.

As shown in FIG. 67, the main control board 4100 includes a +5V generation circuit 4100g, a main control filter circuit 4100h, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The +5V generation circuit 4100g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 851 through the payout control board 4110, and generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, from this +12V. In the main control board 4100, the power supply system to which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 4100g is applied and supplied becomes the +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V power supply line generated by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 4100, and the +5V power supply of the main control board 4100 The +5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 4100g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as boards other than the main control board 4100. FIG.

The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with +5V produced by the +5V production circuit 4100g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 4100a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 4110, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100b, etc., +24V from the payout control board 4110, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of a +12V or +24V power failure or momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a through the main control board 4100 and the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control board 4110. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100 . Also, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in FIG. 68(b). At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrates of the door frames and the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 .

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line, and thereby detects the voltage applied to one of the +12V power line and the +24V power line. Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be detected more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 70 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 71 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 4100h shown in FIG. 67 will be described, followed by the power supply created by the main control board 4100, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, the main control MPU Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 4100 and the interface circuit for communication between the peripheral control boards 4140 will be described.

The main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, a +5V generation circuit 4100g, and a main control MPU 4100a shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 4100h, peripheral circuits include a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz )).

As shown in FIG. 69, the main control filter circuit 4100h is mainly composed of a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 4100g, its 2nd terminal connected to the ground (GND), and its 3rd terminal to remove noise components. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the like.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. When the circuit 4100g cannot generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a Although the main control MPU 4100a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0, the memory contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control internal RAM.

The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor MC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open-collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4100ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 4100a and the reset function The main control output circuit 4100ca with is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically unconnected to the outside. state.

The main control input circuit 4100b receives detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020, the starting opening switch 3022, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. This is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch provided on the control board 4110 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input will be described here.

First, as described above, the operation switch is the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), and when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after turning on the power, and an error cancellation after turning on the power (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). and the ability to perform Since the main control board 4100 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 4110 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, the main control built-in It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the RAM, and processing for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

The main control board 4100 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch is not operated, and the logic is HI from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch is operated. The operation signal is input from the payout control board 4110 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch provided on the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR0 via resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 4100a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch in the payout control board 4110 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch is It is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor. In the main control board 4100, when the operation switch is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input, while the operation switch is operated. Sometimes the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

When the operation switch is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. be. The main control MPU 4100a judges that when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. do.

On the other hand, when the operation switch is operated, an operation signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor and logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning on the transistor MTR0 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. be. The main control MPU 4100a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. to decide.

An operation signal from the operation switch is pulled up to +12 V by a pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch is input through the payout control board 4110 . That is, between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is higher than +5V A voltage of +12V is used to improve signal reliability. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020 and the starting opening switch 3022, which are directly input to the main control board 4100, are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor, while the panel shown in FIG. The detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024, the count switch 2110, the general prize winning port switch 3020, the gate switch of the valid gate, and the gate switch that triggers the ordinary lottery, which are input via the relay terminal plate 4161, are the main control. Since it is not directly input to the substrate 4100, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch.

As shown in FIG. 67, the main control board 4100 is supplied with two voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when a power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, a power failure warning signal is sent as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 4100a and a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 4120 a of 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140 . Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

As shown in FIG. 70, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e mainly comprises a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) , +12V are used to compare the monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 70, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, is a resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V applied to the No. 3 terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that when +24V is interrupted or instantaneously interrupted, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitor voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 70, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21 to which +12V monitor voltage V2 is applied, is a resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line and whose other end is The other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND) is electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25 grounded to the ground (GND). electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that, when +12V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the reference voltage Vref is applied.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. A preset D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor MC24 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). A logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q is inverted in logic to be negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the D input terminal 1D terminal and the clock input terminal 1CK terminal grounded (GND), respectively. The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a through a main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to a CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be stopped after a predetermined period of time after starting to be output in the processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a when power is turned on on the main control side, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is adapted to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal. In addition, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 4100cb outputs to the payout control board 4110 as a payout power outage warning signal, and outputs to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 4100b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the amplifier MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 4100a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR20. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes LOW in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 4110 as the payout power outage notice signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the wiring is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 62 in the payout control board 4110 In the circuit 4120b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. connected

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. MTR21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR21. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 4110 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 through the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110 .

In addition, the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 4140 as the peripheral power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b, and is connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control section 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. , one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR23. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR23. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the logic becomes LOW and the signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 4140 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness). 4140.

In this way, a main control input circuit 4100b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 4100a as a blackout warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from a peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power outage warning signal and a main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function each have one transistor. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is issued to the payout control board 4110 while the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 4140 is the same logic. The main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function that outputs a power failure warning signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 4140, and is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 4100a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb is connected via wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in 4110, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the main control MPU 4100a are connected to the main control board. 4100, the power failure notice is performed by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power failure notice signal using +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, whereas the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 and between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140, in order to suppress the influence of noise intruding into the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the main control MPU 4100a, A power failure warning is performed by the power failure warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU 4120a and the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 4100a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 4100a, receives serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 61 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 4100b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 4100a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 4110 as the main payment serial data transmission signal as the main control output without reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is sent to the circuit 4100cb and sent to the payout control board 4110 from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. A peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 4100 cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100 cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 4140 .

In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 4110 is input via the main control input circuit 4100b, and detection signals from various switches such as the starter switch 3022 shown in FIG. 61 are input via the main control input circuit 4100b. be equal to.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Then, a main payment ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the payout control board 4110, and a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function for the starting solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. and output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the starting port solenoid 2105 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. For each device, a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, and the drive signal is output to each display device from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function.

Next, an interface circuit for communication between main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress this, +12V, which is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 4100 causes the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). It is composed mainly of

+12 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, for example, due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure, when the power from the power supply board 851 is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 .

In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 470 μF) shown in FIG. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 4100aec and transmitted from the transmission shift register 4100aea as the main peripheral serial data.

The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, +12V, which is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 4100aec and transmits it. When transmitted from the shift register 4100aea as main cycle serial data, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets are stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 on the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal for outputting the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

A circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND). As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and also turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is grounded (GND), and the negative terminal is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is transmitted as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, when the +5 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5V. When a power outage or momentary power failure occurs, +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is transmitted to the main control MPU 4100a. The transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the data without missing or missing data.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50 to turn on the transistor MTR50, thereby turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. . Thus, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of

Thus, in this embodiment, the +5V power line to which +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a is applied and the +12V power line to which +12V which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 are applied. , measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, the +5V power supply line, the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 4100h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of diode MD50 as a communication voltage for main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply. there is As a result, the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being lost. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate command failures immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during an instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are all configured as main peripheral serial data by the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h is set to 470 μF so that transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are reset so that all of them function as interface circuits as main peripheral serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the non-functioning main control output circuit 4100cb, the peripheral control board 4140 can prevent the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from being interrupted or missing. can be received without fail.

Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 62 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 77. FIG. FIG. 72 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit etc. of the payout control section, FIG. 73 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 74 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 73, and FIG. FIG. 76 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 77 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

As shown in FIG. 72, the payout control filter circuit 4110a is mainly composed of a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5 V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 77, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 851 is smoothed by the capacitor PC0 by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage). The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, etc., which will be described later. .

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded (GND).

Moreover, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU4120a, and one end is grounded (GND) and the capacitor PC4 which is grounded. is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and through the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power source generation circuit 855d of the power source substrate 851 shown in FIG. Since it is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM The memory contents are held by applying the VBB voltage.

The payout control unit 4120 includes a payout control MPU 4120a, a payout control input circuit 4120b, a payout control output circuit 4120c, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 4120e. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment). Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, payout control input circuit, payout motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

+5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and incorporates a delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor PC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when +5V input to the power terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open-collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output with reset function. While input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4120ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset function The attached payout control output circuit 4120ca is reset. One end of the power terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor PC7, and the +5 V input to the power terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

+5V, the noise component of which has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 4110a, is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0. When +5 V is applied to the OE terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, the 8 MHz clock signal is output from the OUT terminal, which is the output terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

The payout control input circuit 4120b receives the payout power failure notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the body frame open switch 619, and the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 62, a circuit to which a detection signal is input from the full-tank switch 550 via the power supply board 851, a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch 860a, and the like. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be explained, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input, the circuit to which the output power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which the detection signal from the full-tank switch is input and a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. In addition, since the output terminals of the full-tank switch, the ball-off switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal is input is almost the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full-tank switch is input will be described here.

The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame is opened from the body frame, and the door frame is closed to the body frame. , the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR20 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. , and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Further, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 61 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR22 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR20 and a capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 5 is opened from the body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed with the body frame 3, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from 618 .

When the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. be. Further, when the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . Further, when the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 4100 .

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed from the body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. , the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR21 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. FIG. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to +5 V, thereby turning the transistor PTR22 on. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 4100 .

In this way, when the door frame 5 is released from the body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The outer end frame door open information output signal which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100. When the door frame 5 is closed to the body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. , the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100 .

The body frame open switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the body frame is opened from the outer frame, the switch is turned ON (conductive), and the body frame is closed by the outer frame. , the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR23, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the wiring (harness) shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 . When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR24 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR28 and a capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame open switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the body frame open switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit made up of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23 and a circuit made up of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from body frame open switch 619. FIG.

When the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . In addition, when the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 4100 .

On the other hand, when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to the external terminal board 784 . When the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 through the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the main control board. 4100.

In this way, when the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. A main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100. On the other hand, in the state where the main frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned off, thereby turning off the logic. is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100 .

In this embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 5 is closed with the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 61, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 61 receives the main frame door opening signal. Although it cannot be determined whether the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the body frame 3 is open, which does not occur during a normal game, and that the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since the outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, the hall computer outputs the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. 5 is released from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, but the door frame 5 and/or the main body frame 3 are opened. It can be determined that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are normally closed switches. Even if the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 and the main body frame open switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducted), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. By adopting normally closed switches for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 in this way, it is possible to output the main frame door open signal to the main control board 4100 even in the event of a short circuit. A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

If the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame open switch 618' and body frame open switch 619'), , the door frame open switch 618' is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3. . The body frame open switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 . Then, even if the door frame open switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 5 will remain in the state of being released from the body frame 3. Even if the frame release switch 619' is broken and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. FIG. In this way, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame open switch 618' and the body frame open switch 619', the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when the wire is broken. An outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

A transmission line for transmitting a power outage warning signal from a power outage monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR40 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as the payout power failure warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an output power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100. FIG.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 851, and when the power failure or momentary power failure signs are detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 4100cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of power failure or momentary power failure, and as described above, the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 4110, either the condition that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf or the condition that the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf When the condition is established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the above-mentioned pull-up resistor PR40 through the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 4110 .

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V. Occasionally, since a payout power outage warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power outage notice signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110, so that the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 to turn on the transistor PTR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power outage warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

In this way, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a, When there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the +12V and +24V voltages, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 4100a are the same logic.

A detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is input to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board and the power supply board 851 . The output terminal of this full tank switch 550 is circuit-configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control board 4110. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank switch. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank switch is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank switch is grounded (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank switch is connected to the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank switch via a resistor PR44b. and the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via a resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank switch 550 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR47 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR41 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a as a full tank signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46, and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the full-tank switch 550. FIG.

The full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full of stored game balls, as described above. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not filled with stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate and the power supply board 851 to control payout. In the substrate 4110, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and logic becomes HI is input to the payout control substrate 4110. The voltage applied to the output terminal of the button switch 550 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal plate and the power supply board 851, and the logic becomes LOW signal on the payout control board. 4110.

When the storage space is not filled with stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is pulled in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the power supply board 851. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the up resistor 44a and having a logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning on the transistor PTR41 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate and the power supply board 851, and in the payout control board 4110. When the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full-tank switch 550 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank switch. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball-off switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. It has a circuit configuration in which it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full tank switch 550 is provided in the foul cover unit attached to the door frame, it is compared with the ball cut switch 750, the counting switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, etc. provided in the ball prize device attached to the main body frame 3. As a result, the path through which the detection signal is transmitted becomes extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit is full of stored game balls. Based on the detection signal, when it is determined that the storage space is full of stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 7 is forcibly stopped, and control is performed to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotator. It's like In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) for transmitting the detection signal from the full-tank switch 550, the payout control MPU 4120a drives the payout motor 744 even though the storage space is not filled with game balls. In some cases, the control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 744 is driven and controlled even though the storage space is full of stored game balls. When the game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the winning ball passage by rotating the payout rotor and continuing the payout of the game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 744 is activated. When the load is applied abnormally, the payout motor becomes overloaded and abnormally heats up and breaks down, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotation shaft of the payout motor to the rotary motion of the payout rotator breaks down. Therefore, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the noise component of the detection signal from the full-tank switch 550 is first removed by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank switch.

The first and second output terminals of the operation switch 860a are grounded (GND), and the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 860a are pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 860a, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end and the other end of the capacitor PC41. ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding stage and the subsequent stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is the RWMCLR signal input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. is entered in

The third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 860a are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR44 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a as a RAM clear signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR48 and a capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 860a is pressed, the contact forming the operation switch 860a repeats ON/OFF for a short time, which is a flapping phenomenon. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 860a caused by .

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the previous stage, a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44 are switched. is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

As described above, the operation switch 860a is set to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and to cancel an error after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM is cleared, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). It has a function and The operation signal from the operation switch 860a is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ), it becomes an error cancellation signal.

When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage applied is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the error is not instructed, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). It is judged that it is not instructive.

Further, when the operation switch 860a is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is generated by the transistor PTR44. , the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 4100. is entered. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control MPU 4100a judges that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage applied is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is cleared. It is judged to be an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 860a is being operated, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 to turn off the transistor PTR44, thereby turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 4100 . The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control MPU 4100a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the figure payout motor will be described. The payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4120da and a drive ICPIC 60, as shown in FIG. The power supply input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4120da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. It is designed to be The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, through a Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 744. , and +12 V or +5 V is applied as the motor drive voltage to the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the Zener diode PZD 60 based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. It is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, respectively, and also supplied to the payout motor 744 .

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, 6th terminal and 7th terminal, are grounded (GND) respectively, and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is grounded. A payout motor drive signal is input to certain 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63. The 2nd, 4th, 9th and 11th terminals that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are connected to the 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the excitation signal A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 744, respectively. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the drive ICPIC 60 is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function via resistors PR60 to PR63. Outputs are made to base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching exciting currents flowing through the phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, and /A phase) of the payout motor 744 to rotate the payout motor 744 . When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the front stage of the 3rd and 10th terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. A circuit configuration that

Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 4120e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 63 will be described. The payout control board 4110 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and ground LG created from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Through the terminal plate 869, an EXS signal to inform that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or impossible. and output As shown in FIG. 76, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 . A resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. 72 through ICPIC80 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it.). is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR70 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR72, but also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR71 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71, and the signal is input to the power substrate 851 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. be.

A circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 851 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply substrate 851. be.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 851 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 851. be done.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. A resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC71, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a as the BRDY signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6. FIG.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. A resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as the BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6. FIG.

An EXS signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, which indicates the start or end of one payout operation, is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb, and is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function. 4120cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC73 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by a pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC73 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting EXS is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . In this way, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal, which indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is possible or not, is sent via the resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. is entered in The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC74 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a When the logic of the PRDY signal that is output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. , is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC74, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . In this way, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. It has the same logic.

Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 72, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a, receives the serial data from the main control board 4100 as the main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 4120b. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 4100 is sent as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control board 4100 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a is connected to the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), etc., etc.), for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100, which indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal, is sent via the payout control input circuit 4120b. Also, detection signals from the ball-out switch 750, the counting switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, etc. shown in FIG.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb, and the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 4120e, the voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. Alternatively, the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the payout motor 744 via the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function outputs a payer ACK signal that informs the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and the payment is made from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. The main ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. to the error LED indicator 860b, and so on.

Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 4100 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(a), the payout control board 4110 controls the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 4100 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100. FIG.

On the other hand, the payout control board 4110, in addition to the above-described main payout serial data reception signal, main payout ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), 15-round big-hit information output signal, 2-round big-hit information output signal, etc. Jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. Game information signal and payout power outage notice A signal or the like is input from the main control board 4100 . These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110.

The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door open information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor, From the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, in addition to the jackpot information output signals such as the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal, the information output signal during probability fluctuation, the special symbol display information output signal , Normal symbol display information output signal, information output signal during time saving, and game information signals such as start winning prize information output signal and the like are output to the external terminal board 784 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 .

A signal output from the external terminal plate 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of jackpots with two rounds (2-round jackpot number of occurrences) and the number of big wins with 15 rounds (number of occurrences of 15-round big wins) is the sum of the number of big wins of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of the 2-round big win and the number of occurrences of the 15-land big win from the summed number of big wins, the actual number of big wins occurring in the pachinko game machine 1 is large. However, it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko game machine 1, and some players refer to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter to decide whether or not to play the game. Some choose.

However, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of occurrences of the two-round big win, so even if the player starts playing the game, only the two-round big wins occur. Sometimes the 15 round jackpot doesn't happen easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily stir up the gambling spirit of the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by separately outputting the 15 round big win information output signal and the 2 round big win information output signal as the big win information output signal to the hall computer, the hall computer can output the number of occurrences of the 2 round big win, The number of 15-round big hits and the number of occurrences can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big wins that actually occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 was the 2-round big win or the 15-round big win. Since the number of occurrences of the round big win and the number of occurrences of the 2nd round big win can be separately displayed or only the number of occurrences of the 15 round big win can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big win game state, it is possible to arouse the gambling spirit of the players more than necessary. Nor.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big win information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round big win to the end of the 2-round big win, and the 15-round big win information output signal is also in the state where the 15-round big win occurs. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the time it occurs to the time it ends. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round big win occurs, the 2-round big win information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information are output to the hall computer, and when the 15-round big win occurs, the 15-round big win information output signal is outputted to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer only for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 79 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 79, and FIG. 81 is a table showing an example of various commands received by the main control board from the payout control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switch 3020, the starting opening switch 3022, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. Based on this, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko game machine 1, drive the payout motor of the pachinko game machine 1 (prize ball device 740), and use game balls as rental balls, which are storage trays. is electrically connected to a device that pays out (such a pachinko game machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. Commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be sent to 4110. Command 10H designates one prize ball, and command 11H designates two prize balls. is specified, . .

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 and the ball lending machine are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall) and the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), and as shown in FIG. , one prize ball is designated, command 21H designates two prize balls, . . . , command 2EH designates 15 prize balls. The payout control board 4110 controls to drive the payout motor 744 and pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 78(c), and this command 30H designates self-check. If an ACK signal output from the receiving side as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input for a predetermined period after the transmission of the command, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input. Check connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 4110 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6 .

Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Various commands, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, are related to special figure 1 synchronizing effect, special figure 2 synchronizing effect related, jackpot related, power on, normal figure synchronizing effect related, normal electric role effect related, notification display, status classified into display and others.

The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the starting switch 3022 shown in FIG. 61, and as shown in FIG. It consists of a command named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and state designation at the time of fluctuation regarding one special symbol display 1185. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , Special figure 1 synchronization production end command is intended to indicate the end of special figure 1 synchronization production, state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates probability and time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production start, Special figure 1 synchronization The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (at the time of special symbol 1 determination), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing which will be described later.

The special figure 2 synchronization effect relation is based on the detection signal from the switch of the second start port, and as shown in FIG. Consists of a command named special figure 2 synchronization production start, special symbol 2 specification, and special figure 2 synchronization production end for the display device 1186. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization production is intended to instruct the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 79, the section related to big win includes big win opening, big win 1 open Nth time display, big win 1 closed display, big win 1 count display, big win ending, big win pattern display, small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the jackpot 1 opening N-th display command is the start of the jackpot 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (the Nth round of the jackpot 2003). The command for closing the big winning prize 1 indicates the start of closing the big winning prize 1 between rounds (during or starting to close the big winning prize 2003 between rounds). The command for displaying one count of the big winning opening indicates that the count has been counted from 0 to 10 (the number of game balls entering the big winning opening 2003, detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 61). The big-hit ending command instructs the start of the big-hit ending, and the big-hit design display command instructs the display of the big-hit design information.

In addition, the small winning opening command is for instructing the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is the starting of the small winning opening (during opening or opening of the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 at the time of the small winning) start), and the small hit count display command is a small hit middle and large winning opening winning effect production), and the small-hit ending command instructs the start of the small-hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the command for displaying the jackpot 1 Nth time is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds. When the winning opening 2103 is opened for the Nth round), the large winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when closing the large winning opening 1 (starting closing of the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100), and the large winning The mouth 1 count display command is when the big winning mouth 1 is opened and the count changes to the big winning mouth 1 (when the big winning mouth 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened and the game ball entering the big winning mouth 2103 counts switch 2110), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot is opened (when the jackpot 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). be.

Further, the small win opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small winning). The hit count display command is transmitted when the small hit middle big winning opening is won (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is Sent at the start of the jackpot ending. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 79, the category of power-on consists of various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on shown in FIG. 62). instructions).

As for the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at times other than RAM clear and RAM clear at power-on of the main control board. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, the main control side power-on processing described later is executed, and the power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

The general pattern synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 61, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named production start, general pattern designation, general pattern synchronization production end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization production start command instructs the start of the general pattern synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specification command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronous production end command indicates the end of the normal figure synchronous production, and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designation command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is , It is transmitted when the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses (when the normal pattern is determined), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal pattern win-loss information is designated. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

The normal electric role effect relates to the movable piece 2005b that is opened and closed by driving the starting solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. It consists of a command named Display and Ending per Figure. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The general pattern opening command instructs the general pattern opening start, and the general pattern opening display command instructs the general pattern opening start (the movable piece is opened by driving the start port solenoid). , and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of the ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern opening command is sent at the start of the general pattern opening, and the general pattern open display command is sent when the general pattern is opened (when the movable piece opens by driving the starting solenoid) ), and the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 80, the classification of the notification display consists of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 when the game ball enters the big winning opening other than during the big win (when the condition device is in operation). When the count switch 2110 detects), the connection abnormality display command instructs the start of the winning abnormality notification, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, the electrical connection in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 It instructs the start of connection abnormality notification when there is an abnormality, and the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, a disconnection of the electrical connection between the main control board 4100, the start switch 3022, the count switch 2110, and the like.・When a short circuit occurs, it instructs the start of disconnection/short circuit abnormality display, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is a magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. to indicate the start of

Further, the door opening command is based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the dispensing control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door is in the open state, the door frame closing command indicates that the door is open, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 5 to close with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 . When it is in the state of being opened, the end of the door open notification is instructed. On the other hand, the body frame opening command is based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The body frame closing command indicates that the body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619. When it is in the state, it instructs the end of the body frame open notification.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a large winning opening other than during the jackpot (condition device is in operation), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 It is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission to, and the disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command is a disconnection or short circuit state of the starting port switch 3022, count switch 2110, etc. The magnetism detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetism detection switch 3024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is in a state of being opened with respect to the body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame is closed with respect to the body frame based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body frame is closed. The command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 619). Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 80, the status display is divided into commands named Frame status 1 command (equivalent to error occurrence command), Error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to error cancellation command) and Frame status 2 command. there is These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed descriptions thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. Along with setting the status, the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the additional information "7*H" is added to these received commands. is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is transmitted when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when power is restored. , and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 80, the test-related section consists of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control section 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control section 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame board shown in FIG. 64). Various boards such as the decoration drive amplifier board 194 are inspected).

As for the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and the RAM clear. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the pachinko game machine 1 is restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, the main control side power-on processing described later is executed, and the test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

Other divisions include, as shown in FIG. 80, start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H" ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The starting opening winning command is for instructing the starting opening winning effect start, and based on the detection signal from the starting opening switch 3022, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2005c and the start of the production, respectively, the variable reduction operation end designation command is for instructing the state transition from the variable reduction operation state to the variable reduction non-operation state, and the high probability end designation command is a high It instructs the state transition from the probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 1 reservations (the game ball enters the first start port 2001 and the function display board It conveys the number of balls (number of reservations) that have not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device, and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 reservations (second start A game ball enters the mouth 2005c and the second special symbol display device of the function display board informs the number of balls (reserved number) that has not been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol storage command is , normal symbol 1 reserved 0 to 4 pieces (the number of balls (number of reservations) that are not yet used for normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display device of the function display board after passing through the normal gate part 2005a)) The special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is read ahead before the special symbol 1 reserve is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display board, and the special symbol 1 reserve It instructs the start of the look-ahead effect that notifies the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display device based on Before it is used for the variable display of special symbols, it is intended to instruct the start of the look-ahead performance for notifying the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device based on the special symbol 2 hold by looking ahead.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting entrance winning command is issued at the time of starting entrance winning (when the game ball enters the first starting entrance 2001 based on the detection signal from the first starting entrance switch, or when the game ball enters the second starting entrance When the game ball enters the second start opening 2005c based on the detection signal from the opening switch), the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame mainly sound that The command to specify the end of the fluctuation reduction operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the stop period has passed), and the high-probability end designation command is , In the case of "high probability N times", it is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the high probability number of times has been digested (after the stop period has passed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number change When the game ball enters the first starting port 2001 and there is a reserved number that is not yet used for the variable display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device of the function display board, and the second starting port 2005c When a game ball enters the game ball and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the second special symbol display device to display the fluctuation of the special symbols from the number of reservations), the special symbols are sent 2 storage command is used when the number of special symbols 2 operation pending balls changes (the game ball enters the second start port 2005c and the second special symbol display device of the function display board is not used for the variable display of the special symbols) In the state where there is a reserved number, when the game ball enters the second start port 2005c and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the second special symbol display device is used for the variable display of the special symbol. When the reserved number is reduced), the normal design memory command is sent when the number of normal design 1 operation reserved balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate part 2005a and the normal design changes on the normal design display device of the function display board In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for display, when the game ball passes through the gate portion and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the normal symbol display unit is used for the variable display of the normal symbols. When the number of reservations is reduced), the special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls increases (when the game ball enters the first start port 2001 and the number of reservations increases) , and the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls increases (when the game ball enters the second start port 2005c and the number of reservations increases). Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

By the way, as described above, the start-up winning command is transmitted mainly by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the main body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame when the starting-up prize is won. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 64 uses the start-up winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko game machine. For example, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box provided in the main body frame and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame, it is also possible to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. It is designed to be used. On the other hand, in other pachinko game machines, when the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start-up winning command, the speaker housed in the speaker box provided on the body frame and the speaker provided on the door frame can output voice. Some specifications do not notify.

Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

Various commands from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (equivalent to the error occurrence command) is prepared for ball out, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection error and CR unconnected, and bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit.) is set to 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and connection failure A value of 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value of 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 1 command have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) is prepared for sphere glitch, count switch error, and retry error. Bit 3 (B3) is set to a value of 1, and on retry errors, bit 4 (B4) is set to a value of 1. Here, "counting switch error" indicates whether or not the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 62 is malfunctioning. A "retry error" indicates that an inconsistent game ball was repeatedly put out by a retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have value 0 for B0, value 0 for B1, value 0 for B5, value 1 for B6, A value of 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is provided with "draw ball", and bit 0 (B0) is set to "1" during ball draw. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B2, a value of 0 in B3, a value of 0 in B4, a value of 1 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, and A value of 0 is set in B7.

As transmission timings for these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at power restoration, frame state change, and error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation. is sent when power is restored and when frame status changes. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (especially the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 94. FIG. FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power failure occurs. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of special control processing. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the start-up winning process. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the process during fluctuation.

Moreover, FIG. 90 is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game start process. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot game process. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game process. Note that the timer interrupt processing is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

As for the main process, as shown in FIG. 82, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (whether or not it is the set value at the time of power failure). For example, according to the backup data stored in the RAM, the process to return to the state at the time of power failure (power recovery process) is executed, and if the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU (normal initial settings , interrupt timing settings, etc.).

If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. Also, if a RAM clear switch for instructing clearing of backup data stored in the RAM is turned on in power-on processing, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. Also, in the power-on process, if backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and normal initial settings are performed.

In addition, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has started up to the peripheral control board 4140 when normal initial setting is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has started. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is restored. Power-on processing is executed when the supply is started.

When this power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process for repeatedly executing each game process. At the start of this loop process, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted to a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, and then each supplying the equipment. When a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board falls below a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure warning signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 will be stopped. sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects a power outage warning signal in step S2, the power failure processing is executed (step S4).

In this power failure processing, when the power supply voltage (24 V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board is restored after a power failure (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the game machine is restored to the state before the power failure. In order to start from , the state at the time of power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the details of the processing will be described later, in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure processing is not interrupt processing, but branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power is normally supplied from the external power source, random number update processing 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). The random numbers updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83, the power failure occurrence process is a process that is executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU 4100a first performs interrupt prohibition settings so that interrupt processing is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure are retained when power is restored.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM to a specified value indicating that the power failure processing has been performed (step S4c). After completing the above processing, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for power supply stoppage. In addition, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure"), and the power failure processing is started, the actual Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that the above process will not be able to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined period of time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while processing is being performed normally, but when power failure occurs processing is entered, updating is not performed. As a result, even if an instantaneous power failure causes the power failure processing to occur and an infinite loop to occur, the main control MPU 4100a is activated by the same process as when the power is turned on, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Next, the timer interrupt processing is performed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during execution of the main processing every 4 ms. After executing the register saving process (step S10), the control MPU 4100a executes the processes from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring detection signals of the switches (gate switch, start sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 and the random number updated in the random number update process 2 are different. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of game balls is set in the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

In addition, in the normal control process of step S14, based on the progress of the game, normal symbols are changed, normal electric accessory (movable piece 2005b) is controlled, and the opening/closing state of second start port 2005c is changed. to run. In the special control process of step S15, the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 variably display the first special symbol (first identification symbol) and the second special symbol (second identification symbol) based on the progress of the game, A special electric accessory (that is, an opening/closing member 2006 that opens and closes the large winning opening 2003 by an attacker solenoid) is controlled, and processing such as changing the opening/closing state of the large winning opening 2003 is executed.

In the subsequent output data setting process of step S16, the process of outputting a state signal indicating the game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (eg, management computer, etc.), outputting a drive signal to a special figure start memory display (not shown) process, etc. In the command transmission process of step S17, the process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed. Also, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control board 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processing from step S11 to step S17 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing ends.

Various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will now be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, the jackpot determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot game state (also called jackpot determination or jackpot lottery), and the jackpot game state in the jackpot determination. A random number for the jackpot pattern used to determine the stop pattern of the special pattern (symbol associated with the type of jackpot (probability variable jackpot, number of rounds, etc.) when it is determined to be generated, in the jackpot lottery A reach judgment random number used for judgment (reach judgment) as to whether or not to perform a high-expectation production such as a reach production when it is judged that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit (losing), a special pattern display device 641, A variable display pattern random number (random number for variable time) used to determine the variable display pattern (variable time, etc.) of the special symbol displayed in 642, and the movable piece that opens and closes the second start port 2005c is controlled to the open state. There is a normal winning determination random number used for determining whether or not to play (ordinary lottery winning determination).

Further, as will be described later, the random number for judging a big hit according to this embodiment is also used for judging whether or not a specific condition is satisfied when it is judged that a big hit has been lost. be done. In addition, the random number for the jackpot pattern is the type of jackpot performed when it is determined that the jackpot has been won (whether or not to operate the probability variation function or the time saving function, the jackpot game (special bonus game) 2003, which is determined by the opening mode, etc.).

Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, the random number for judging the big hit, the random number for the big hit pattern, and the random number for judging the normal pattern, which is related to whether or not to control the movable piece 2005b to the open state. update. That is, the random number used for determining whether or not to control the generation of the big hit game state and the movable piece 2005b to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability of each random number in a predetermined period (probability of determining to generate a jackpot game state, probability of determining to control the movable piece to the open state) can be made constant, and the player can can be prevented from becoming unfavorable. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the occurrence of the big win game state, the ready-to-win determination random number, the variation display pattern random number, etc., which are not related to the normal lottery, are updated.

Next, special control processing will be described based on FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of special control processing.

In this special control process, first, the first/second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed. In this first/second start opening winning process, judgment as to whether or not the game ball has won the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2005c is performed. Then, after the first and second starting opening winning process (step S110) is performed, a process corresponding to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from among a plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the figure. will go to

More specifically, when the first and second starting entrance winning process (step S110) is finished, it is first determined whether the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 ( YES in step S120), the fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In this fluctuation start process (step S130), the process flag is updated to "1" after setting for starting the fluctuation display of the special symbols based on the result of the jackpot lottery.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), a variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device (either the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device , the processing flag is updated to "2" after the variable time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display, etc.) is determined.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the during-fluctuation processing (step S180) is executed. In this process during fluctuation, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and based on the timeout, the special symbol in the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is displayed. Stop the variable display. Then, after that, when it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S130) that the big win has been won, the process selection flag is updated to "3". On the other hand, when it is determined that a specific condition is established (a small win is won) although the player has lost the big win, the process selection flag is updated to "4". However, when the big hit is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss), the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process (step S130) is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the jackpot game start processing (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start processing, the type of the jackpot is determined, and after the opening mode (the number of rounds, the opening time, and the winning limit number of game balls, etc.) of the jackpot 2003 corresponding to the type is set, the processing flag is set. It is updated to "5". On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). And as a result, if the processing flag is 4 (YES in step S210), small hit game start processing (step S220) is executed. In this small-hit game start process, after the opening mode (number of times of opening and time of opening for controlling the opening operation of the opening/closing member 2006, etc.) of the big winning opening 2003 corresponding to the small-hit is set, the processing flag is set to "6. ” is updated.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 5 (step S230). As a result, if the processing flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a big hit game processing (step S240) is executed. In this jackpot game process, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode of the jackpot 2003 set in the jackpot game start process (step S200). Further, when the jackpot game ends, the processing flag is updated to "0" after a determination as to whether or not to operate the probability variation function or the time saving function is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process (step S130) is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S230), the processing flag is 6, and the small winning game processing (step S250) is executed. In the small winning game process (step S250), the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode of the big winning opening 2003 set in the small winning game start process (step S220). Also, when the small hit game process ends, the process flag is updated to "0", that is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process (step S130) is restarted.

In this way, when any one of the processes of steps S130, S150, S180, S200, S220, S240, and S250 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is terminated.

Next, the first/second start opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing an example of the first/second starting opening winning process.

In this first and second starting hole winning process (step S110), roughly speaking, a process for determining whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 2001 or the second starting hole 2005c, and the winning On the condition that it is determined that there is a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), a process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol is performed.

Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal has been output from the second start opening sensor. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from the second starting port sensor (switch), it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 2005c (YES in step S201), Next, the process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second big win lottery (random number for judging the big win, random number for the big win design, etc.) are acquired, and the second reservation provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is obtained. A determination is made as to whether the value of the number counter is less than four, which is the upper limit. As a result, if the second suspension number counter is less than 4, the second start suspension storage process (step S203) and the suspension history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs the second start suspension storage process (step S203), various data (random numbers for judging big hits, Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as a hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

In addition, in the process of step 203, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has won a prize to the second starting port 2005c (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of reservation, etc.) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, through the control by the peripheral control board 4140, when the suspension display on the second start port 2005c side is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like, it can be quickly updated.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S201, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor is not output, or in the processing of step S202, the value of the second holding number counter becomes the upper limit value 4 When it is determined that it is, as processing in step S205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been output from the first start opening sensor. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal has been output from the first starting hole sensor, it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 2001 (YES in step S205), and then The process of step S206 is performed. In the processing of this step S206, various random numbers for the first big win lottery (random number for judging the big win, random number for the big win design, etc.) are obtained, and the value of the first reservation number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether the value is less than four. As a result, if the first suspension number counter is less than 4, the first start suspension storage process (step S207) and the suspension history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs the first start suspension storage process (step S207), various data (random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for big hit symbols etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

Also in the process of step 207, a winning notification command indicating that a game ball has won a prize to the first starting port 2001 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of reservation, etc.) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, through the control by the peripheral control board 4140, even when the hold display on the first start port 2001 side is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like, it can be quickly updated.

On the other hand, in the process of step S205, when it is determined that there is no winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001, in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first reservation number counter becomes the upper limit When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first and second starting opening winning processing is terminated at this point.

In this embodiment, after executing the winning process (steps S201 to S204) to the second starting port 2005c, the winning process to the first starting port 2001 (steps S205 to S208) is executed. there is However, instead of this, after executing the winning process for the first starting port 2001, the winning processing for the second starting port 2005c may be executed.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on various random numbers obtained, and further transmit a command indicating the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control board 4140 as a winning notification command. The preceding determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the big hit lottery, the probability variable lottery, the small lottery, and the determination of the variation display pattern described later), and the lottery result is determined in advance. This is the process of determining to The precedence determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the precedence determination table. The precedence determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random numbers. In the advance judgment process, by comparing the random number and the advance judgment table, the lottery result when the lottery using the random number is performed (whether the big hit or the small hit, the type of the big hit, the fluctuation display pattern, etc. ) is determined (such a determination performed prior to the lottery is also called a “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control board 4140 may implement an effect reflecting the received award notification command (advance determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is referred to as "prefetching (also known as “performance”).

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the contents of the precedence determination table are the same as the contents of the table used for the lottery. However, at least part of the contents of the precedence determination table may differ from the contents of the table used for the lottery.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notification command representing the result of the preceding determination process only when the gaming state satisfies a specific condition, and when the specific condition is not satisfied, the preceding determination process is executed. A winning notification command that does not represent the result may be sent. For example, if the variable display caused by the winning to the first start port 2001 is not started immediately after winning and is put on hold, the main control MPU 4100a issues a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process regarding the winning. You may send. Here, in the big hit game state and the time saving game state, the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit the winning notification command representing the result of the preceding determination process, but transmits the winning notification command not representing the result of the preceding determination process. You may The specific conditions for the second starting port 2005c may be the same.

In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is "0", the main control MPU 4100a first stores the values of the two pending number counters (first start memory and the second start memory number) are both "0" (step S301). Here, the values in the two holding number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 are the storage areas for the first start memory and the second start memory (special symbol random number storage means 4515 and 4532 (see FIG. 94 ) respectively indicate the number of random numbers stored in. Therefore, if the value of the pending number counter is both "0" in this step S301 (YES), It is determined that none of the starting conditions are met, and when the process flag is updated to "1" as the process of step S318, the fluctuation start process ends.

On the other hand, if neither the number of first start memory nor the number of second start memory is "0" (NO in step S301), in order to update the order of execution of the big hit lottery that is in the pending state, Shift processing is performed in the random number storage means 4515 and 4532 (steps S302 to S310).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 94(a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d), These storage areas are associated with the values of the first starting storage numbers (“1” to “4”), respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 94(b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d), These storage areas are associated with the values of the second starting storage numbers (“1” to “4”), respectively. In each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d, a random number storage area for judging a big hit 4580 for storing a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for judging a reach, a random number for a fluctuation display pattern, etc. are stored. Random number storage areas 4581 for jackpot symbols are provided respectively.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately manipulates the random numbers stored in these storage means 4515 and 4532 as shift processing in the random number storage area (steps S302 to S310) when the special symbols change. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a big win is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side, and when a big win is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side. Although there is no difference in the expected value of the profit (such as the number of winning balls that can be obtained) given to the player between While there is a case of winning, in the lottery process on the side of the second special symbol, the probability of winning a small hit is "0%", so only the lottery process on the side of the second special symbol is executed. As long as it is done, the small winning game state is not generated.

In this respect, in the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the execution of the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the above-mentioned second win that does not involve the operation of the condition device (minor win) is not won. The random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 are manipulated so that the lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) based on the winning to the second start port 2005c is completed first. As a result, only games (lottery on the side of the second special symbol) under the condition that the above-mentioned sub-win is not won are performed sequentially until the number of reservations for the lottery on the side of the second special symbol breaks off and becomes "0". will be able to Also, as will be described later, in the gaming state in which the so-called time saving function operates, the lottery (variation) so that the holding state of the second special symbol lottery (variation), which is the side to be digested first, is not interrupted. Since the control is performed to increase the frequency of changing the game ball to the second start port 2005c to make it easier to win the game ball, the second special symbol side lottery (fluctuation) only continuous execution Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small win.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 94, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the second special symbol which is preferentially digested Whether the value of the pending number counter (second start memory number) corresponding to the display 642 is "0", that is, the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the random number storage means 4532 for the second special symbol. determine whether or not As a result, when it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (NO in step S302), the storage area [1] 4532a to the second A random number relating to the special symbol is read out and acquired (step S303). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers read out in this way (random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for judging reach, random numbers for fluctuation display patterns) are used not only for the process of lottery for big hits, but also for fluctuation patterns (variation patterns) of special symbols. time, stop display mode, etc.), processing for setting the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing member 2006, processing for setting the game state, etc. A second starting game triggered by winning of the ball can be progressed.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates the digestion order for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side, n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas (storage area [2] 4532b ~ storage area [4] 4532d) are shifted to the n-1th storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c) (step S304). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4532d becomes empty, and new start information (suspension) for the second special symbol can be stored in this storage area [4] 4532d.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" so as to indicate that the second special symbol side game (second starting game) is in progress (step S305). ). Further, in order to update the number of reservations (fluctuation) on the side of the second special design, the number of reservations counter corresponding to the second special design is subtracted by "1" (step S306). Also at this time, the drive control for the lighting of the lamp is performed so that the number of pending lotteries (fluctuations) on the side of the second special symbol updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode in the second special symbol storage display 644. will be The special symbol variation flag set to "1" in this manner is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0", for example, after the variation start process is completed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 94, in the process of step S302, if it is determined that the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (YES in step S302), the random number related to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area [1] 4515a of the random number storage means 4515 for the first special symbol and acquired (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers read out in this manner are used not only for the processing related to the jackpot lottery, but also the processing related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, the processing related to setting the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing member 2006, and the setting of the game state. , etc., the first starting game triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001 can be progressed.

Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates the digestion order related to the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side, each of the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b ~ storage area [4] 4515d) are shifted to the n-1th storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c) (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4515d becomes free, and new starting information (suspension) for the first special symbol can be stored in this storage area [4] 4515d.

After that, the main control MPU 4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "2" so as to indicate that the game on the first special symbol side (first starting game) is in progress (step S309). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations for the lottery (fluctuation) on the side of the first special symbol, "1" is subtracted from the number-of-reservations counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S310). Also at this time, drive control for lighting of the lamp 643 so that the number of holdings related to the lottery (variation) on the side of the first special symbol updated in this way is also reflected in the lighting mode in the first special symbol memory display 643 is done. Similarly, the special symbol variation flag set to "2" in this manner is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0" after the variation start process is completed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state is high probability (step S312). , i.e., a table in which the probability of a big hit is set to be low is selected. Choose a table set high. In this example, when the probability variation is not activated (that is, normal time), the probability of a big hit is set to 1/400, and when the probability variation is activated (that is, when the probability is high), the probability of a big hit is set to 10. /400.

In the process of step S313 or step S314, after any table is selected, based on the table, the random number for judging a big hit related to any of the special symbols acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 is a big hit. It is determined whether or not it is a random number (jackpot value) corresponding to (step S315 (jackpot lottery)). If it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the type of big win is determined based on the random number for big win symbol related to any special symbol, which is similarly acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307. (Step S316). After that, the flag corresponding to the type of big hit is turned ON (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

On the other hand, if the obtained random number is not a big hit value but a loss (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number (small hit value) corresponding to a small hit (step S319). Then, if it is a small hit value (YES at step S319), the small hit flag is set to "ON" assuming that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (step S320), and the process proceeds to step S318. However, if it is not a small hit value (NO in step S319), it is assumed that a predetermined specific condition is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318 without going through step S320. In step S318, the processing flag is updated to "1", and the fluctuation start processing ends. Incidentally, in this example, the probability of a small hit is set to 3/400 regardless of the game state.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of whether the lottery is for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, random numbers generated with a random number range of, for example, 0 to 99 are generated as random numbers for the jackpot symbol. Numerical values are prepared, and in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random numbers is acquired as the value of the jackpot symbol random number. The obtained random number value is used in the process of determining the type of the big hit in the process of step S316. If it is 53-57, it is determined as a big hit B, if it is 58-63, it is determined as a big hit C, if it is 64-81, it is determined as a big hit D, and if it is 82-99, it is determined as a big hit E. .

According to such a judging method, as shown in FIG. 95, the probability that the type of the big win (a win accompanied by the operation of the conditional device) is determined to be "big win A" is "53%". is determined to be "jackpot B" is "5%", the probability that the type of jackpot is determined to be "jackpot C" is "6%", and the types of jackpots are "jackpot D" and "jackpot The probability of being judged as "E" is "18%" respectively.

Here, if the "jackpot A" is won, regardless of the gaming state when the selection is made, the probability variation function and the time saving function (open Extension function) is controlled to a probability variable external advantageous game state in which both operate. In the big win game corresponding to the winning of the big win A, the opening and closing of the opening/closing member 2006 is repeated many times (16 times in this embodiment) in a long opening/closing pattern. The long-time open/close pattern means that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 to 33 seconds) elapses after the open/close member 2006 is changed from the closed state to the open state, or a predetermined large number (for example, 10). game ball wins the big winning opening 2003, and the opening/closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when any of the conditions are satisfied. In this long-time opening/closing pattern, the time during which the opening/closing member 2006 is open is longer than the time during which the opening/closing member 2006 is opened in the short-time opening/closing pattern described later. That is, in the long open winning game, the player can substantially obtain a large number of prize balls (about 1750 balls in this embodiment) as a privilege.

On the other hand, even if the "jackpot B" is won, regardless of the game state when the selection is made, the probability variation function and the time saving function ( Open extension function) is controlled to a probability variable external advantageous game state in which both operate. However, in the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot B, the opening and closing of the opening/closing member 2006 is repeated several times (in this embodiment, nine times) in a long-time opening/closing pattern. . That is, in the middle-open winning game, the player can substantially obtain a middle amount of prize balls (about 1000 pieces in this embodiment) as a privilege.

On the other hand, when "jackpot C" is won, the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C wins only when the game state at the time of the corresponding selection is "external advantageous game state in which the time saving function is activated" After being performed, it is controlled to a probability variable external advantageous game state in which both the probability variation function and the time saving function (open extension function) operate. However, if the game state at the time of selection is not "external advantageous gaming state in which the time saving function operates", after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot C is performed, the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (open extension function), it is controlled to a high certainty gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability variation function operates. In addition, in the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot C, the opening and closing of the opening/closing member 2006 is performed as the above-described middle opening winning game in which the opening and closing of the opening/closing member 2006 is repeated several times (in this embodiment, nine times) in a long opening/closing pattern.

On the other hand, if the "jackpot D" is won, regardless of the game state when the corresponding selection is made, after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot D is performed, the probability variation function and the time saving function (open extension function), it is controlled to a high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability variation function operates. In addition, in the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot D, the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned middle open winning game in which the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2006 is repeated several times (9 times in this embodiment) in the long opening and closing pattern.

On the other hand, when the "jackpot E" is won, regardless of the game state when the corresponding jackpot E is won, after the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot E is performed, the probability variation function and the time saving function (open extension function) are controlled to a normal game state (normal external disadvantageous game state). In addition, in the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot E, the opening and closing of the opening/closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned medium opening winning game in which the opening and closing of the opening/closing member 2006 is repeated several times (in this embodiment, nine times) in a long opening/closing pattern.

By the way, for such big hits A to E (hit with the operation of the condition device), if a small hit (hit without the operation of the condition device) is won, the opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2006 is opened and closed for a short time. Only a small opening per game (small winning game) that repeats a few times (in this embodiment, twice) is performed in the pattern, and the same game as before the small opening per game (small winning game) is performed. There is no such thing as a game state different from the later one. The short-time opening/closing pattern means that a predetermined short time (eg, 3 to 6 seconds) elapses after the opening/closing member 2006 is changed from the closed state to the open state, or a predetermined small number (eg, 2) of games is played. This is a pattern in which the opening/closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when the ball enters the big winning opening 2003 and satisfies any of the winning conditions. That is, in the small opening winning game (small winning game), since the player can substantially acquire only a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) as a privilege, the opening and closing member 2006 operates. It can be said that care must be taken in handling (positioning) in terms of game design, as the interest in the game may decrease despite the fact that it is.

Thus, in the pachinko machine according to this embodiment, "jackpot A" to "jackpot E" are prepared as the types of hits (jackpots) associated with the operation of the condition device. Therefore, further detailing the process of step S317, when the type of the big win is "big win A", the big win flag A is turned on (set), and when it is "big win B", the big win flag B is turned on (set). ), the jackpot flag C is turned ON (set) when the jackpot is C, the jackpot flag D is turned ON (set) when the jackpot is D, and the jackpot flag E is set when the jackpot is E. It is set to the ON state (set).

Next, a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of special symbols based on the result of the big hit lottery (step S315) will be described. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is "1", the main control MPU 4100a first sets the jackpot flag to "ON" as the process of step S401. Determine whether or not As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is "ON" (YES in step S401), the jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is executed in order to set the fluctuation pattern when the jackpot is won. (Step S402).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not "ON" in the process of step S401, it is then determined whether the small hit flag is "ON" as the process of step S403. As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is "ON" (YES in step S403), the small win is won as a condition that the specific condition is satisfied although it is not a loss. A small hit variation pattern table setting process, which will be described later, is performed so that the variation pattern of the time is set (step S404).

On the other hand, in the process of step S403, when it is determined that the small hit flag is not "ON", next, as the process of step S405, a high expectation effect (for example, ready-to-win effect etc.) with a high expectation of winning the big hit. determine whether or not to In the process of step S405, for example, when the random number for reach determination obtained in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87) is a predetermined hit value, it is determined that a high-expectation effect will be performed, and the obtained reach When the random number for judgment is not a predetermined winning value, it is judged that the high-expectation performance is not performed. As a result, when it is determined that the high-expectation effect should be performed (YES in step S405), the high-expectation loss variation pattern table setting process described later is executed in order to set the variation pattern when performing the high-expectation effect. (step S406).

In addition, regarding the number of predetermined hit values prepared for the reach determination random number, the normal external unfavorable gaming state (probability variable function and time saving function are both non-operating), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only time saving function is operating) , a variable probability external unfavorable gaming state (only the variable probability function is activated), and a variable probability external advantageous gaming state (both the variable probability function and the time saving function are activated). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external unfavorable gaming state, the probability that the high-expectation effect should be performed based on the reach determination random number being a predetermined winning value is Although it is "1/12", in the normal external advantageous game state and the probability variable external advantageous game state, the expectation at the time of reach is further increased (or so that efficient pending digestion is performed) , it may be determined that the high-expectation effect should be performed with a lower probability. Conversely, in the variable probability external unfavorable gaming state, it is determined that the high-expectation performance should be performed with a higher probability so as to make the player aware of the possibility of a big win with a higher frequency. good too.

On the other hand, in the process of step S405, when it is determined that the high expectation effect with high expectation of winning the jackpot should not be performed (NO in step S405), the loss variation pattern when the high expectation effect is not performed. Low-expectation loss variation pattern table setting processing is performed so that (normal loss variation pattern) is set (step S407).

Here, the table set in the low-expectation loss variation pattern table setting process is prepared in such a manner that it is associated with each of a plurality of game states. Shortening variation is performed when it is equal to or greater than.

However, in the gaming state where the time saving function is activated, the fluctuation time is so that the number of reservations (fluctuations) on the second special symbol side in which the probability of winning a small hit is "0" is difficult to be interrupted. is set. More specifically, when the number of reservations on the second special symbol side is less than or equal to a predetermined value, the shortening variation is not adopted in spite of the game state in which the time saving function operates, and the shortening variation is adopted in the normal game state. Only the variation time (variation time longer than the shortened variation in the normal game state) having a length equal to or longer than the variation time when the game is not played is selected. In addition, regarding the fluctuation time on the first special symbol side, shortened fluctuation is not adopted regardless of the number of reservations, and only fluctuation time with a length equal to or longer than the fluctuation time when shortened fluctuation is not adopted in the normal game state is selected. As a result, in the gaming state in which the time-saving function is activated, the holding of the first special symbol side that can win a small win is suppressed from being digested, and eventually the pachinko machine 1 receives a small win. It becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the device is installed.

Then, as will be described later, as shown in FIG. 88, when the selection table for the variation pattern is set in any one of steps S402, S404, S406, and S407, the main control MPU 4100a Next, as the process of step S410, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the set selection table. Then, as the process of step S411, along with setting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol thus determined as a production command, winning information based on the state of the big hit flag (step S317) and small hit flag (step S320) Set a command (a command that indicates the type of winning, including wins and small wins).

Furthermore, the variable time value corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When this special figure LED operation flag is set to ON, based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display A variable display according to the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as a device is started. After that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

By the way, the variation pattern set in this variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 84 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. . As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the result of the big win lottery is displayed based on the variation pattern indicated by the performance command and the information indicated by the winning information command through control by the peripheral control board 4140, which will be described later. The display effect will be performed as follows.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the big win lottery is a win (minor win) without the operation of the condition device, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is set as described above. Without ending within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, extended to the period after the stop of the fluctuation display related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator (Production time (extended effect pattern in FIG. 104(b)) to indicate that the win (jackpot) with the operation of the condition device is lost. That is, in this case, after the special symbol is stopped, when the small opening winning game is executed, the display effect that encourages the acquisition of the prize ball does not appear, and relatively soon after the fact that the big winning is lost is indicated. It is possible to shift to the next variation (reservation digestion of special symbols), and it is possible to suitably avoid delays that may give some expectations as a performance until the opening and closing member 2006 operates. Become.

In addition, although this will also be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a special A display performance (extended jackpot performance) is also provided to indicate that a big win has been won after the symbols are stopped. That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit (jackpot) with the operation of the condition device, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not finished within the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern, and the first special Winning a hit (jackpot) with the operation of the condition device after extending the period after the stoppage of the variable display of the lighting patterns of the multiple LEDs as the symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator (extended effect pattern in FIG. 104(b)).

That is, in this case, the above-described display effect at the time of the small win is positioned as a mere loss effect (highly expected loss variation pattern) that appears when the big win is lost. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a win (minor win) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the opening/closing member 2006 operates according to the winning of the minor win. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease in

However, as the function display unit of the pachinko machine 1, instead of the 7-segment LEDs, a group of 8 LEDs that do not form a specific symbol may be employed. In this example, the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol indicator, which are composed of 7-segment LEDs, are each composed of eight LED groups. In addition, the first special symbol memory display and the second special symbol memory display are each composed of four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory display is composed of two LEDs.

In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as above, this function display unit also has a first special pattern display device and a second special pattern display device composed of eight LED groups that do not form any symbols. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to remember the special symbols displayed, as compared with the case of using 7-segment LEDs having meanings based on numerical symbols. Therefore, since it is difficult to understand the contents displayed on the function display unit, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit from disturbing the user during the game and make it difficult to concentrate on the game. The game can be made more enjoyable by allowing the player to concentrate on the performance images and the like.

When such a function display unit is adopted, the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDs (special symbols) at the time of winning the small win (when the special symbols are stopped) is the same as the lighting state of the plurality of LEDs (special symbols) at the time of winning the big win. It is desirable to control so as to appear as modes similar to each other, for example, the only difference is whether or not one LED is lit from the lighting mode (at the time of stopping the special symbol) of the symbol). That is, in this case, when the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol, even if the same symbol (plurality of LEDs) is seen, the result is immediate (at least after the extension of the effect It becomes difficult to grasp until a short time passes until the winning or losing is clearly indicated. Therefore, as well as being able to concentrate on the extended display effect (extended effect), the interest in the special symbol (plurality of LEDs) is reduced, and the special symbol is extended to the period after the stop. It becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize even that the displayed effect is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent guessing that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small win due to the peculiarity of the appearance of the extended performance, and furthermore, according to the winning of the small win. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the operation of the opening/closing member 2006.例文帳に追加

Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 967 is a table showing an example of a normal big hit variation pattern table T1, a normal small hit variation pattern table T2, and a normal high expectation loss variation pattern table T3. In addition, ○ in the column of winning and losing in the same figure 96 means a big hit, △ means the establishment of a specific condition at the time of loss (small hit), and × means the failure of the specific condition at the time of loss (pure loss). means.

As described above, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON in the process of step S401 (see FIG. 88), the main control MPU 4100a wins the jackpot as the process of step S402 (see FIG. 88). A big hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern at the time of winning is set.

In this big hit variation pattern table setting process, first, normal external unfavorable gaming state (both probability variable function and time saving function are not operated), normal external advantageous gaming state (only working time saving function), probability variable external unfavorable gaming state (only probability variable function operation), and the probability variable external advantageous gaming state (both the probability variable function and the time saving function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different jackpot variation pattern table (illustration omitted) is prepared for each game state, and the normal external disadvantageous game state (probability variable function, time saving function are both non- operation), the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 96 is selected regardless of the jackpot type.

And as described above, when the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1 is thus selected, the main control MPU 4100a refers to the selected table T1 and is acquired by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87). The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator (LED) is also determined.

Here, assuming that a value of, for example, "0" to "99" can be obtained as the variation display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1, these values of "0" to "99" Among them, 9 specific values are assigned to variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) (9% selection rate at the time of jackpot), and 20 specific values are assigned to variation number 5 (variation time Tb1). (20% selection rate at the time of the big hit), 30 specific values are assigned to the variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) (30% selection rate at the time of the big hit), and 40 specific values are Variation number 12 (variation time Td1) is assigned (selection rate of 40% at the time of big hit), and one specific value is assigned to variation number 15 (variation time Te) (selection rate of 1 %). In this way, except for the variation number 15 that confirms the big win, the number of allotted specific values (jackpot values) tends to increase as the variation number increases.

As will be described later, when the variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) is selected, it is indicated that the jackpot has been won with the effect content "a (or a')" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the variation number 5 (variation time Tb1) is selected, the big win is won under the condition that the content of the presentation "b (or b')" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. is performed, and when the variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) is selected, a big win is won under the condition that the content of the presentation "c (or c')" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the variation number 12 (fluctuation time Td1) is selected, a big hit is achieved with the effect content "d (or d')" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. A display effect indicating that the player has won is performed, and when the variation number 15 (variation time Te1) is selected, the effect content "e" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the big win is won. is displayed. Incidentally, the effect content a, the effect content a', the effect content b, the effect content b', the effect content c, the effect content c', the effect content d, the effect content d', and the effect content e are all displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. There are different types of display effects (for example, types of ready-to-win effects and types of story effects) that appear.

Also, as will be described later, the variable time Tb1 is longer than the variable time Ta1, the variable time Tc1 is longer than the variable time Tb1, and the variable time Tc1 is longer than the variable time Tc1. Also, the fluctuation time Td1 is longer than the fluctuation time Td1, and the fluctuation time Te is longer than the fluctuation time Td1.

And as described above, in such a normal jackpot variation pattern table T1, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87) , the effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, command "01H" for variation number 1), and the winning information command (including the winning type of winning and small winning) command) are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, if the variation number is 1, the variation time Ta1) is set to the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

On the other hand, in performing the jackpot variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the jackpot variation pattern table associated with the determined game state is selected. Then, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but a description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous game state, which of the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side and the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side won the jackpot? Regardless, it was decided to select the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1, but when the first special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed and when the second special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed By selecting a jackpot variation pattern table having different contents, display effects with different contents may appear.

Also, when it is determined that it is in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (probability variable function and time saving function are both non-operating), regardless of the type of jackpot, the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 96 is selected. However, one of the normal jackpot variation pattern tables prepared for each jackpot type may be selectively used based on the state of the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type.

In other words, in this case, the selection rate of the variation pattern can be made different according to the type of the jackpot, and when a specific variation pattern appears, the probability of winning the jackpot of a specific type is increased. become. In addition, even if the variable time is the same, the variable number (production command) can be made different according to the type of the big win. , it becomes possible to grasp the type of jackpot. Therefore, if the peripheral control board 4140 side compares the performance command and the winning information command to determine their appropriateness, the reliability of the communication with the main control board 4100 can be improved. be able to

Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of a small hit will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, if it is determined that the small hit flag is ON in the process of step S403 (see FIG. 88), the main control MPU 4100a executes the small hit as the process of step S404 (see FIG. 88). A small hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that a variation pattern when winning is set.

In this small hit variation pattern table setting process, first, normal external unfavorable gaming state (both probability variable function and time saving function are not operated), normal external advantageous gaming state (only time saving function is activated), probability variable external disadvantageous gaming state (positive variable function It is determined whether it is in any gaming state of variable probability external advantageous gaming state (both variable probability function and time saving function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different small hit variation pattern table (illustration is omitted) is prepared for each game state, and the normal external disadvantageous game state (probability variable function, time saving function are both When it is determined that it is in non-operating), the normal small hit variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 96 is selected.

And as described above, when the normal small hit variation pattern table T2 is thus selected, the main control MPU 4100a refers to the selected table T2 and acquires it in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 877) A special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the received variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator (LED) is also determined.

Here, assuming that a value of, for example, "0" to "99" can be obtained as the variation display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the normal small hit variation pattern table T2, these "0" to "99" Among the values, 35 specific values are assigned to variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) (35% selection rate at the time of small hit), and 30 specific values are variation number 6 (variation time Tb2) (30% selection rate at the time of the small hit), 30 specific values are assigned to the variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) (20% selection rate at the time of the small hit), and 5 A specific value is assigned to variation number 13 (variation time Td2) (5% selection rate at the time of a small hit). In this way, as the variation number increases, the number of allotted specific values (small hit values) tends to decrease.

As will be described later, when the variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) is selected, the result of the jackpot lottery is shown on the liquid crystal display device 1400 with the effect content "a (or a')" appearing. When the effect is performed and the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2) is selected, the result of the jackpot lottery is shown with the effect content "b (or b')" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. - 特許庁When the performance is performed and the variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) is selected, the result of the jackpot lottery is shown with the performance content "c (or c')" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. - 特許庁When the performance is performed and the variation number 13 (variation time Td2) is selected, the result of the jackpot lottery is shown with the performance content "d (or d')" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. - 特許庁A performance is held. By the way, as such a display effect showing the result of the big win lottery, for example, a display effect showing that the big win has been lost, or a transition to a game state in which prize balls can be obtained by the operation of the opening/closing member 2006. A display effect (a display effect that appears even when a big hit is won) showing that the game will be played is appropriately adopted.

Also, as will be described later, as the length of the variable time, the variable time Ta2 is set as a length of time (same or similar) based on the variable time Ta1. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, what kind of results can be obtained as a jackpot lottery under the condition that the performance content "a (or a')" appears in both cases? A pair of renditions of whether the In addition, the fluctuation time Tb2 is set as a length of time (the same or an approximate time) based on the fluctuation time Tb1. When number 6) is selected, a pair of performances showing what kind of result is obtained as a jackpot lottery appears while the performance content 'b (or b')' appears. In addition, the fluctuation time Tc2 is set as a length of time (the same or a similar time) based on the fluctuation time Tc1. When number 10) is selected, a pair of performances about what kind of result is obtained as a big win lottery appears under the condition that the performance content 'c (or c')' appears. In addition, the fluctuation time Td2 is set as a length of time (the same or a similar time) based on the fluctuation time Td1. When the number 13) is selected, a pair of performances showing what kind of result is obtained as a jackpot lottery appears under the condition that the performance content 'd (or d')' appears.

And as described above, in such a small hit variation pattern table T2 at normal time, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number obtained in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87). , the effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the command "02H" for variation number 2), and the winning information command (including winning and losing, and the winning type ) are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, variation time Ta2 if variation number 2) is set to the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

On the other hand, in performing the small hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that it is another game state different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the small hit variation pattern table associated with the determined game state is selected, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but the description thereof will be omitted. However, if a small hit is won in the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated (external advantageous gaming state), a single variation pattern is determined, and display processing is performed indifferently without arousing expectations (for example, pure loss It is desirable to perform the same display processing as the low-expectation effect at the time).

Next, based on FIG. 96, the variation pattern determination processing at the time of high expectation performance will be described.

As described above, if it is now determined in the process of step S405 (see FIG. 88) that the high-expectation effect should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a performs the high-expectation effect as the process of step S406 (see FIG. 88). High expectation loss variation pattern table setting processing is performed so that the variation pattern for effecting is set (step S406).

Even in this high-expectation loss variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external unfavorable gaming state (both the probability variable function and the time saving function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time saving function is activated), the probability variable external disadvantageous gaming state ( It is determined whether it is in any gaming state of probability variable function only activated) and probability variable external advantageous gaming state (both probability variable function and time saving function activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different high-expectation loss variation pattern table (illustration omitted) is prepared for each game state, and the normal external disadvantageous game state (probability variable function, time saving function 96, the normal high-expectation loss variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 96 is selected.

Then, as described above, when the normal high-expectation loss variation pattern table T3 is thus selected, the main control MPU 4100a refers to the selected table T3 and performs A special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the acquired variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol indicator 641 or the second special symbol indicator 642 (LED) is also determined.

Here, assuming that, for example, a value from "0" to "99" can be obtained as the variable display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the normal high-expectation loss variation pattern table T3, these "0" to "99" Of the values, 40 specific values are assigned to variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) (selection rate of 40% when high expectations are lost), and 17 specific values are assigned to variation number 4 (variation time Ta4) (17% selection rate at high expectation loss), and 25 specific values are assigned to variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) (25% selection rate at high expectation loss). , 13 specific values are assigned to variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) (selection rate of 13% when high expectations are lost), and 3 specific values are assigned to variation number 11 (variation time Tc3). (3% selection rate at high expectation loss), and two specific values are assigned to variation number 14 (variation time Td3) (2% selection rate at high expectation loss). In this way, the number of assigned specific values (loss values) tends to decrease as the variation number increases.

As will be described later, when the variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) is selected, the effect content "a, no development (or a')" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the big win is lost. When the variation number 4 (fluctuation time Ta4) is selected, the display performance indicating that the player has lost the jackpot while the performance content ``a, with development'' appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. is displayed, or a display effect is performed to show that the player has lost the jackpot with the effect content "c'" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) is selected. When this is done, a display effect is performed to show that the big hit has been lost with the effect content "b, no development (or b')" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the variation number 8 (variation When the time Tb4) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a display effect indicating that the player has lost the big prize while the effect content "b, with development" appears, or the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays the effect content " d'" is displayed, a display effect is performed to indicate that the big hit has been lost, and when the variation number 11 (variation time Tc3) is selected, the effect content "c (or , c′)” is displayed, a display effect is performed to indicate that the big hit has been lost, and when the variation number 14 (variation time Td3) is selected, the effect content “d (or d')" is displayed, a display effect is performed to indicate that the player has lost the big prize. Incidentally, as will be described later, at the time of variation numbers 4 and 8, it appears as a failure effect pattern with different effect contents depending on the control mode on the side of the peripheral control board 4140, and this causes the loss effect pattern to appear. Since the variation numbers of the jackpot performance patterns paired with the variation numbers 4 and 8 are changed between the variation numbers 1 and 5 and the variation numbers 9 and 12, the control mode on the side of the peripheral control board 4140 is changed. Effect patterns with different degrees of expectation for big wins can be made to appear accordingly.

Also, as will be described later, as the length of the variable time, the variable time Ta3 is set as a length of time (same or similar) based on the variable time Ta1. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1), the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2), or the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) are selected, any kind of jackpot lottery will be performed under the condition that the effect content "a" appears. A pair of renditions will appear as to whether the result was obtained. However, when the variable time period Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variable time period Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, the opening period before the opening/closing member 2006 opens/closes the big winning hole 2003 is changed to the effect content "a". Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) longer than the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is prepared as a paired losing effect pattern when such an extension effect is performed. ing. In addition, this variable time Ta4 (variation number 4) is also set as a length of time (the same or similar time) based on the variable time Tc3 (variation number 11). Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern for the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11). As a result, the variation number of the big hit effect pattern paired with the variation number 4 of the losing effect pattern is changed between the variation number 1 and the variation number 9 as described above.

Furthermore, the variable time Tb3 is set as a length of time (same or similar) based on the variable time Tb1. When the variation number 6) and the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) are selected, under the condition that the performance contents 'b' are displayed, a pair of performances as to what kind of result is obtained as a jackpot lottery appears. However, when the variable time period Tb1 (variation number 5) or the variable time period Tb2 (variation number 6) is selected, the opening period before the opening/closing member 2006 opens/closes the big winning hole 2003 is changed to the effect content "b". Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Tb4 (variation number 8) longer than the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) is prepared as a pair of losing effect patterns when such an extension effect is performed. ing. In addition, this variable time Tb4 (variation number 8) is also set as a length of time (the same or similar) based on the variable time Td3 (variation number 14). Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern for the variation time Td3 (variation number 14). As a result, the variation number of the big hit effect pattern paired with the variation number 8 of the losing effect pattern is changed between the variation number 5 and the variation number 12 as described above.

Then, as described above, in the high-expectation loss variation pattern table T3 at normal times, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number obtained in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 87). Then, the effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, command "03H" for variation number 3) and the winning information command (including the winning A command indicating the seed) is set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta3 if the variation number is 3) is set to the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

On the other hand, in performing the jackpot variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the high expectation variation pattern table associated with the determined game state is set. A table is selected, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but a description thereof will be omitted.

According to the normal-time big-hit variation pattern table T1, the normal-time small-hit variation pattern table T2, and the normal-time high-expectation-losing variation pattern table T3, the degree of expectation for the big hit is the display performance b rather than the display performance a. is higher, the display effect c is higher than the display effect b, the display effect d is higher than the display effect c, and the display effect e is higher than the display effect d. In particular, since the display effect e can appear only when the big win is won, it is determined that the big win is won when the effect e appears.

Next, the process during fluctuation (step S180) executed when the process flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the process during fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the process during fluctuation (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a first, as the process of step S501, changes the fluctuation time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 88). is timed up. If the variable time set in the timer has not timed out (NO in step S501), the variable process is ended.

If the variable time set in the timer has expired (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When this special figure LED operation flag is set to OFF, based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display Variation display (variation of special symbols) related to the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as a device is terminated. In addition, when the display effect for the big win lottery is being performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a confirmation stop command indicating to the peripheral control board 4140 that the effect result in the same display effect should be confirmed and displayed in order to end this. is set (step S503). This fixed stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side, the result of the same display effect is determined and displayed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, depending on the control mode in the peripheral control board 4140, the display performance on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not ended despite the reception of the fixed stop command, and the opening period after that As described above, control may be performed so that the display effect is extended to .

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S504). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to "3" assuming that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the variation is stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot has been won (step S505). , terminates the in-varying process.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not ON and the big win is lost (NO in step S504), next step S506 is performed to determine whether the small hit flag is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S506), the processing flag is updated to "4" assuming that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped so as to indicate that the small hit has been won (step S507), the process during fluctuation is terminated.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not ON but a pure loss (a loss where the specific condition is not satisfied) (NO in step S506), a special The processing flag is updated to "0" assuming that the symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped (step S508), and the processing during the fluctuation is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbol is performed on the condition that it is reserved and digested in the process of step S130.

Next, the jackpot game start process (step S200) executed when the process flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot game start process.

As shown in FIG. 90, in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the main control MPU 4100a first activates the condition device as the process of step S601. Next, as the process of step S2602, a function (probability variation function) that increases the probability of winning a hit (jackpot) with the operation of the condition device is in operation ( probability fluctuation state). As a result, when it is determined that the game state is either the probability variable external disadvantageous gaming state or the probability variable external advantageous gaming state and the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S602), the probability variation function is activated. Stop the operation (step S603).

And next, as the process of step S604, thus the operation of the probability variation function is stopped, the function (time saving function) to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start port 2005c is in operation (time saving game state) Determine whether or not If it is not determined in the process of step S602 that the probability variation function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. As a result, when it is determined that the game state is either the normal external advantageous game state or the probability variable external advantageous game state and the time saving function is in operation (YES in step S604), the time saving function is activated. Stop (step S605).

Then, in order to perform a big hit game with both the operation of the probability variation function and the time saving function stopped in this way, as the processing of step S606, a round game in which the big winning opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the same big hit game. The maximum number of times (in this embodiment, 16 times or 9 times), the upper limit number (predetermined large number) of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 2003 in each round game, and each round The opening mode in the jackpot game is set, such as the opening/closing operation limit time of the opening/closing member 2006 in the game (predetermined long period of opening/closing pattern for a long time). That is, in the process of step S606, first, the type of big win is determined based on the big win flag set in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 87). Then, the information related to the "open mode in the jackpot game" prepared in association with each type of jackpot determined in this way (jackpot A to jackpot E) is obtained from the ROM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is read, and the read information is set. As a result, the jackpot game can be executed with the above-described release modes corresponding to the jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot E). When it is not determined in the process of step S604 that the time saving function is in operation, the process of step S606 is performed without executing the process of step S605.

After that, prior to the performance of the jackpot game, an interval performance before the performance of the jackpot game (for example, an opening performance such as "Congratulations" and a challenge bonus performance such as "Chance to win balls!") is executed. To make it possible, an interval performance command at the time of a big hit is set, which indicates the time from when the special symbols are stopped until the special bonus game (big hit game) is started (step S607). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a big win is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the special symbols are stopped (as described above). Since the extension effect can be executed, the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. That is, only an interval performance command indicating a specific fixed time (e.g., 8 seconds) is set regardless of the type of big win in relation to the time required for the extended performance that appears even when winning a small win. Then, the interval production command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission processing (step S17) shown in FIG. , either the above-described interval effect or the above-described extended effect is selectively performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 through control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side.

Next, an interval production timer (e.g., 8 seconds) associated with the interval production command set in the processing of step S607 is set (step S608), and the processing flag is updated to "5" (step S609). , ends the jackpot game start processing.

Next, the small hit game start process (step S220) executed when the process flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game start process.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the small winning game start process (step S220), the main control MPU 4100a first executes a small opening winning game (small winning game) as the process of step S701. The number of times the big winning opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the game (twice in this embodiment), the upper limit number (predetermined small number) of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 2003 when opened, , The opening mode in the small opening per game (small winning game), such as the opening and closing operation limit time (short time opening and closing pattern) of the opening and closing member 2006 at the time of opening, is set.

After that, prior to the small opening per game (small winning game) being performed, the interval production before the small game is performed (for example, the challenge bonus production such as “chance to win a ball!”) can be executed. Then, an interval production command at the time of a small win, which indicates the time from when the special symbols are stopped until the small bonus game (small win game) is started, is set (step S702). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small win is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the special symbols are stopped (as described above). (extended effect) can be executed, so the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, due to the relationship with the time required for the extended effect that appears even when the big win is won, regardless of the symbol random number (random number for the big win symbol) when the small win is won, a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) is set. Such time setting when the extended performance appears suppresses the possibility that the existence of a small win is guessed, and furthermore, the opening/closing member 2006 operates according to the win of the small win, thereby lowering the interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Next, an interval production timer (e.g., 8 seconds) associated with the interval production command set in the processing of step S702 is set (step S703), and the processing flag is updated to "6" (step S704). , ends the small winning game start process.

As will be described later, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Through the control described later, the interval effect is performed for the time indicated by the interval effect command.

Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is "5" will be described. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot game process.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the big-hit game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first sets the big-hit game flag indicating that the big-hit game is already in progress as the process of step S801. It is determined whether or not it is in the ON state (set).

Here, this big-hit game in-progress flag is operated to the OFF state when it is in a processing state immediately after shifting to the big-hit game process (step S240). Therefore, when it is in the processing state immediately after shifting to the big hit game process (step S240), it is determined that the big hit game flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S801), and then the process of step S802. I do.

In the process of step S802, it is determined whether or not the above-described interval effect (opening effect of confirming the big hit, challenge bonus effect of confirming the opening of the big winning opening 2003 (confirmation of execution of the bonus game), or extension effect) has ended. It is determined whether or not the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) set in the process of step S607 (see FIG. 90) has timed up. The interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has not timed out, and the above-described interval effect (opening effect with confirmation of big win, challenge bonus effect with confirmation of opening of big prize opening 2003, or extension effect) is still being executed. In the case (NO in step S802), the jackpot game process is once terminated, and the interval performance timer (here, 8 seconds) waits until the time is up through the processes of steps S801 and S802 (repeating the interrupt process). It will happen.

However, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, as a result of such processing, even if the interval performance timer (here, 8 seconds) times out (YES in step S802), this alone is enough to hit the jackpot. Judgment as to whether or not the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n (specific reception port) after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up so as not to start the game. (step S803). As a result, when it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n, the big hit game process is temporarily terminated, and the process of step S803 waits until it is determined that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n ( By repeating the interrupt processing), the opening and closing means 2006 of the big winning opening 2003 is opened until the game ball is received in the valid gate 6010n after the time (here, 8 seconds) predetermined by the interval effect timer has timed up. is controlled to maintain the extension in the closed state without operating the .

According to such extension control for the closing control period of the big winning opening 2003, the closing control period (opening/closing member 2006 is maintained and controlled in the closed state), the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) times up When the first closed control period having an indefinite length is defined (step S802), after the first closed control period has passed, a second closed control period having an indefinite length "closed control period" further appears (step S803). Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel performance that mutually utilizes the attribute of the closed control period having a predetermined length and the attribute of the closed control period having an indefinite length. .

More specifically, for the first closed control period (here, 8 seconds), for example, as described above, it is used as an addition time with the variation time of the set special symbol variation pattern, and this addition time is used. As a unit, it is possible to realize an effect using an attribute as a closed control period having a predetermined length, such as extending the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 with respect to the variable display of the special symbol. become able to. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the display effect for the big win lottery may be executed with the effect contents for the time obtained by adding the variation time of the special symbols and the first closing control period. there is On the other hand, for the second closing control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n), for example, using the same period, the feature-length movie until the opening/closing member 2006 operates is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is possible to realize an effect using the attribute of the closed control period having an indefinite length, such as playing on the display device 1400 . That is, the second closing control period (here, the time required for the game ball to pass through the valid gate 6010n) can be terminated as appropriate by the player, so that it is possible to create a full-length movie or the like. To widen the range of performances without causing adverse effects such as lowering of game interest due to delay of performances even when redundant performances are realized.

Then, as a result of such processing, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the effective gate 6010n in the processing of step S803, a jackpot (accompanied by the operation of the condition device) is caused by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. The operation of the opening/closing member 2006 (jackpot game) in accordance with the winning of the win is shifted to a state in which it is possible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started as the process of step S804, and the jackpot game indicates that the jackpot game is already being performed. The middle flag is turned on (set), and then the process proceeds to step S805.

That is, as will be described later, the jackpot start command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission processing (step S17) shown in FIG. Through the control by the side, which will be described later, the display effect during the big hit game is performed. In addition, by operating (setting) the flag during the big hit game in the ON state, when the big hit game process (step S240) is started in the subsequent interrupt control, such steps S801 to S804 Without performing the process of , the process of the following step S805 to perform the process related to the execution of the jackpot game is performed.

In the process of step S805, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 2003 is open. If it is open (YES in step S805), then as the process of step S806, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big winning opening 2003 is set in the process of step S606 (see FIG. 90). It is determined whether or not the specified opening/closing operation time limit (predetermined long time or predetermined medium time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening/closing operation limit time has passed (YES in step S806), the large winning opening 2003 is closed by closing the opening/closing member 2006 (step S808).

However, even if it is determined in the process of step S806 that the set opening/closing operation time limit has not yet passed (NO in step S806), the same operation is performed after the big winning opening 2003 is opened. When the number of game balls entered into the big winning hole 2003 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number (for example, 10) set in the process of step S606 (YES in step S807), step S808 , and the big winning opening 2003 is closed. On the other hand, if the set opening/closing operation time limit has not yet passed (NO in step S806) and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit. (NO in step S807), while maintaining the big winning opening 2003 in the open state, the big winning game process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of step S805, when it is determined that the large winning opening 2003 is not open, the number of openings of the large winning opening 2003 by the opening/closing member 2006 (the number of round games) is ) is reached (step S809). And when it has not reached (NO in step S809), the opening/closing member 2006 is operated to open the big winning opening 2003 (step S810), and the big winning game process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of step S809, when it is determined that the round game has already been played for the maximum number of times, the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device is stopped, resulting in a big hit (a hit accompanied by the operation of the conditional device). The operation of the opening/closing member 2006 (jackpot game) in response to the winning of 2006 is disabled. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of steps S811 to S817, for example, the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separately from the jackpot flag in the processing of step S317 (see FIG. 87). After the game state after the big win game is set based on the kind of winning big win that is the trigger for executing the big win game stored in , the big win game processing is ended. In addition, the winning species here refers to whether or not it is a winning species that activates the probability variation function or the time saving function. , the contents of the information as to whether or not the time-saving function is to be activated differ depending on the game state when it is determined that the jackpot has been won.

That is, first, the big win flag and the big win playing flag are respectively turned off (step S811), and the winning type of the big win that triggered the execution of the big win game is determined (steps S812, S814). Here, in the process of step S812, it is determined whether or not the winning type (big hits A to D) activates the probability variation function. As a result, when it is determined that the winning type is not one for which the probability variation function is to be activated, the process proceeds to step S814 without activating the probability variation function. On the other hand, in the process of step S812, when it is determined that it is a winning species that activates the probability variation function, the probability variation function is activated (step S813), and then the process of step S814 is performed. do.

In addition, in the process of step S814, it is determined whether or not the type of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C won in the time saving game state) that activates the time saving function. As a result, when it is determined that it is not the winning species that activates the time saving function, the operation of the condition device is stopped without activating the time saving function (step S816), and when the processing flag is set to "0" ( Step S817), the jackpot game process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of step S814, when it is determined that it is a winning species that activates the time saving function, after activating the time saving function (step S815), the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S816 ), when the process flag is set to "0" (step S817), the big hit game process is terminated.

According to such a jackpot game start process, the jackpot 2003 is opened according to the type of jackpot (step S806 , step S807, and step S809), and the game player can win prize balls corresponding to the type of the jackpot.

Next, the small hit game process (step S250) executed when the process flag is "6" will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of a small winning game process.

As shown in FIG. 93, in the small-hit game process (step S250) as well, the main control MPU 4100a first executes a small-hit game processing in step S901 to indicate that a small-hit game is already in progress. It is determined whether or not the in-game flag is in the ON state (set).

Here, this small-hit game in-progress flag is operated to the OFF state when it is in a processing state immediately after shifting to the small-hit game process (step S250). Therefore, when it is in the processing state immediately after shifting to the small-hit game process (step S250), it is determined that the flag during the small-hit game is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S901), and then step S902. process.

In the process of step S902, whether or not the above-described interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extension effect) has ended is determined in advance by the interval effect timer set in the process of step 703 (see FIG. 91). A determination is made as to whether or not the time (here, 8 seconds) has expired. When the interval production timer (here, 8 seconds) has not timed up and the above-mentioned interval production (challenge bonus production or extension production) is still being executed (NO in step S902), the small hit game The process is temporarily terminated, and the process of steps S901 and S902 waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) times up.

However, in the small winning game processing (step S250) according to this embodiment, unlike the big winning game processing (step 240), as a result of such processing, the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) timed up. In the case (YES in step S902), in order to start the small hit game only with this, as the processing of step S903, set a small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game, and set a small hit The flag indicating that the game is already being played is operated (set) to the ON state. That is, in this case, as long as the player confirms that the above-mentioned second closed control period does not appear (there is no extension control from the first closed control period having a certain length), the condition device After completely removing the expectation that a bonus game may be played in response to a hit (jackpot) with the operation of The game can be played after removing the expectation depending on the presence or absence of the player.

Further, as will be described later, the small hit start command set in the process of step S903 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. In , through the control described later by the side of the peripheral control board 4140, the display effect during the small hit game is performed. In addition, by operating (setting) the small-hit game flag in the ON state, when the small-hit game process (step S250) is started in the subsequent interrupt process, such step S901 Without performing the processing of ~ step S903, it will be carried out from the following step S904 processing to carry out the processing related to the execution of the small winning game.

In the process of step S904, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 2003 is open. If it is open (YES in step S904), then as the process of step S905, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big winning opening 2003 is set by the process of step S701 (see FIG. 91). It is determined whether or not the set opening/closing operation time limit (predetermined short time of the short time opening/closing pattern) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening/closing operation limit time has passed (YES in step S905), the large winning opening 2003 is closed by closing the opening/closing member 2006 (step S907).

However, even if it is determined in the process of step S905 that the set opening/closing operation time limit has not yet passed (NO in step S905), the same operation is performed after the big winning opening 2003 is opened. If the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2003 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number (for example, 2) set in the process of step S701 (YES in step S905), the step It shifts to the processing of S907 and closes the big winning opening 2003. On the other hand, if the set opening/closing operation time limit has not yet passed (NO in step S905) and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit. (NO in step S905), while maintaining the big winning opening 2003 in the open state, the small winning game process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of step S904, when it is determined that the big winning hole 2003 is not being opened, the number of openings of the big winning hole 2003 by the opening/closing member 2006 is determined in the process of step S701 (see FIG. 91) It is determined whether or not the set maximum number of times (2 times) has been reached (step S908). And when it has not reached|attained (NO in step S908), the opening-and-closing member 2006 is operated, the large prize-winning opening 2003 is opened (step S909), and a small hit game process is complete|finished.

On the other hand, in the process of step S908, when it is determined that the number of openings of the large winning opening 2003 by the opening/closing member 2006 has already reached the maximum number of times, the small hit flag and the small win playing flag are turned OFF. When the state is operated (step S910) and the processing flag is set to "0" (step S911), the small hit game process is terminated.

According to such a small winning game process, until it is determined in the process of step 906 that the opening of the large winning opening 2003 by the opening/closing member 2006 has reached the maximum number of times, the large winning opening 2003 is opened according to the big winning. Although it is an open mode in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the big winning opening 2003 compared to the other open mode, the player can acquire prize balls corresponding to such an open mode. Become.

Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 103. FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms regular processing. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode, and FIG. 103 shows an example of the stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the second effect mode. It is a flow chart.

In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 97, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initial setting process, and interrupts are enabled after the initial setting process. When the initialization process (step S1001) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S1002).

Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment executes 2 ms steady processing as interrupt processing every time 2 ms elapses. That is, in this 2 ms steady process, the counter value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is counted up ("1" is added to the counter value). As a result of repeating the count-up every time 2 ms elapses, when the counter value reaches 8 (when 16 ms elapses), the 16 ms elapse flag T is set and the 16 ms elapse is monitored. The counter value of the counter is reset.

In this regard, in the process of step 1002, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is monitored until it is set in the above-described 2 ms steady process (loop process). As a result, when it is determined that the 16ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), after resetting the 16ms elapsed flag (step S1003), by performing the 16ms steady process described later (step S1004), The 16 ms steady process is performed every 16 ms.

In this 16 ms steady process, based on various production commands received from the main control board 4100, the liquid crystal display device 1400, the LED of each decorative board provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 A process for controlling the speaker is executed. When the 16ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S1002, and the 16ms elapsed flag T is monitored again until the 2ms steady process is set (loop process).
As shown in FIG. 98, in the 16ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first analyzes various effect commands received from the main control board 4100 as the process of step S1100 (command analysis process). Next, based on the analyzed effect command, the control (effect control process) for the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is executed (step S1200). More specifically, the setting of advance notice effects that may appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the determination of the stop pattern of decorative patterns that may appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the like are performed.

Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes sound control processing related to the sound output of the speaker in order to generate a sound effect (for example, BGM) that enhances the performance effect (step S1300). Further, a luminous decoration control process relating to luminous decoration by each decoration board provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is executed (step S1400).

Then, after that, the lamp drive board and the liquid crystal control board are output information in which the commands set in the above processes S1200 to S1400 (in addition to the display commands described later, sound output commands, light emission decoration commands, etc.) are transmitted. Processing is performed (step S1500). As a result, through the liquid crystal display device 1400, the speakers 121 and 391, the door frame and each decorative board provided on the game board, an effect corresponding to the set command is performed.

After this information output process (step S1500) is performed, when the random number update process for updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed (step S1600), the 16 ms stationary End the process.

The processing of steps S1100 to S1600 (16 ms steady processing) is set as a processing amount to be completed within 16 ms. Even if the execution up to the process of S1600 is not completed, the process of step S1600 is continued without returning to the process of step S1100 (from the command analysis process). up to the processing of That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapsed flag has been set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. to start.

In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either one or both of loop processing and 16 ms steady processing in sub-main processing.

Next, the command analysis processing (processing of step S1100) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the command analysis process, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) first performs the process of step S1101 when the effect command from the main control board 4100 is the received command of the peripheral control board 4140. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the storage area (RAM) (step S1101).

That is, when the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment receives the production command from the main control board 4100, interrupts other processing such as 16 ms steady processing to generate a command reception interrupt processing, and this command reception interrupt In the loading process, the effect command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the received command storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 . In the received command storage area, a plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the order of reception of the effect commands from the main control board 4100, and in the command reception interrupt process, these effect commands are associated in the order of reception. It is designed to be stored separately for each of these multiple areas in a form.

In this respect, in the process of step S1101, the content of the received command storage area is checked, and if the effect command is stored, the effect command received earliest from the main control board 4100 is read out from the received command storage area. This is the case (step S1102).

Next, it is determined whether or not the read effect command is a pattern command (a command indicating a variation pattern) among the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 97). is determined (step S1103). As a result, when it is determined that it is the same effect command (YES in step S1103), the variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. When it is set (step S1104), the command analysis process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not the pattern command (the command shown in FIG. 96) (NO in step S1103), the read effect command is sent to the process of step S411 (see FIG. 88). determines whether or not it is a winning information command (a winning information command indicating a winning type including a win or a small win) among the production commands set on the main control board 4100 side ( step S1105). As a result, when it is determined that it is the same effect command (YES in step S1105), when the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1106), End command analysis processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the read-out effect command is not the winning information command (NO in step S1105), the flag corresponding to the received effect command is stored in the corresponding storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140. When it is set (step S1107), the command analysis process ends. Incidentally, as such an effect command, for example, the fixed stop command set on the main control board 4100 side in the processing of step S503 (see FIG. 89), the step S606 (see FIG. 90) and the step S702 Interval effect command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of (see FIG. 91) and the start of the big hit set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S803 (see FIG. 92) There is a command, a small hit start command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S903 (see FIG. 93), and the like.

Next, the effect control processing (processing of step S1200) will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 100, the effect control process includes a decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), a decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), and a big hit based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game. Either display processing (step S1230) or small hit display processing (step S1240) is selectively performed.

That is, as will be described later, in the decorative pattern variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is "0", the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) is set. On the condition that it has been done, the processing for starting the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 including the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. For example, based on the pattern command and the winning information command, the display effect pattern (decorative pattern stop pattern, presence or absence of the above-mentioned extension effect, etc.) is determined, and according to the determined display effect pattern (for the liquid crystal control board ), in addition to setting the display command, it also performs processing such as setting related to the advance notice effect.

In addition, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is "1", basically, it corresponds to the fixed stop command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 99). On the condition that the flag that has been set is set, so that the result of the big hit lottery is shown, including the variable display of the decorative pattern, to end the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 (for the liquid crystal control board 4150 (all), set display commands, and so on. In addition, when the process ends, the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is reset.

Also, in the big hit display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is "2", a flag corresponding to the interval production command at the time of the big hit that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 99), On condition that the flag corresponding to the big win start command is set, the liquid crystal display device 1400 indicates that the big prize opening 2003 is opened, or the display during the big win game state (for example, round display, etc.). , respectively. In addition, when the processing ends, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

In addition, in the small hit display process (step S1240) executed when the process selection flag is "3", a flag corresponding to the interval production command at the time of the small hit that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 99) Alternatively, on the condition that a flag corresponding to the small winning start command is set, the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays the fact that the big winning opening 2003 is opened, or displays an effect during the small winning game state. control respectively. In addition, when the processing ends, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the small hit and the flag corresponding to the small hit start command are reset.

However, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the display performance at the time of a big hit or a small hit on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not finished within the fluctuation time indicated by the received pattern command. , After extending to the period (interval period) after the stop of the variable display related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator, in the display effect after this extension It is designed to have a case where the result of the jackpot lottery can be displayed.

That is, in this case, as will be described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the time required for the extension effect in the interval period, which is longer than the variation time indicated by the pattern command received from the main control board 4100, is also included. A display effect pattern is determined, and a display command (for the liquid crystal control board 4150) corresponding to the determined display effect pattern is set. In addition, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), an intermediate effect stage appears in which the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not finished even though the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set. Therefore, the processing is terminated.

Then, in the big hit display process (step S1230) or the small win display process (step S1240), the extended display effect is indicated by the display command set in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). The processing to be continuously performed will be performed according to the content of the request. Therefore, in the processing during this extension, even if the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set, the effect control according to the command (such as the display control indicating that the big winning opening 2003 is opened). never do.

As described above, the commands set in the processing of steps S1210 to 1230 in the effect control processing are transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 4150 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. As a result, through the control by the liquid crystal control board side, the display effect of the content (display effect pattern, etc.) indicated by the command appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 .

The effect control processing also performs touch panel processing. In this touch panel process, the effect control process detects the contact state on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 based on the detection signal received from the touch panel 246 . This effect control process acquires the coordinate values of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, identifies the position represented by the coordinate values as a detection point, and performs an operation including this initial position. Get information. It should be noted that this effect control process may acquire not only such coordinate values but also the range of the contact surface. Details of this touch panel processing will be described later.

Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is "0" will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the peripheral control MPU 4140a first, as the process of step S1221, changes the variation pattern that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99). It is determined whether or not the reception flag is in the ON state (set). That is, in the process of step 1221, based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition (YES in step S301) on the main control board 4100 side, the fluctuation pattern It waits for the reception flag to be turned on.

Until the variation pattern reception flag is turned on, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the demonstration effect and the effect mode by the processes of steps S1232 to S1237 below.

That is, first, it is determined whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a state in which a demonstration effect is being executed (step S1232), and when it is determined that it is not in the same state, the display effect such as the previous symbol variation is terminated. After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed (step S1236). As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed, a display command (to the liquid crystal control board 4150) for starting the demonstration effect in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is set. The display command set in this way is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 4150 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. will be executed.

It should be noted that, when it is not determined that the predetermined time has elapsed in the processing of step S1236, the decorative design variation start processing is once terminated, and whether the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221) or the predetermined time elapses (YES in step S1236).

Further, as a result of performing such processes (steps S1236 and S1237), if it is determined in the process of step S1232 that the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in a state of executing a demonstration effect (step S1232 YES), it is determined whether or not the player is permitted to operate the effect mode (step S1233).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit without the operation of the condition device (small hit) or a hit with the operation of the condition device (big hit), the liquid crystal Regarding the display effect in the display device 1400, the plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator without ending within the variation time of the variation pattern set on the main control board 4100 side Display effect pattern (extended effect pattern ) and a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected.

Here, an outline of an extension effect pattern that can be selected in the first effect mode and a challenge bonus effect pattern that can be selected in the second effect mode will be described. FIG. 104(a) is a diagram for explaining the extension effect pattern at the time of the big win, FIG. 104(b) is a diagram for explaining the extension effect pattern at the time of the small win, and FIG. 104(c). 104(d) is a diagram for explaining a challenge bonus effect pattern for a big win, and FIG. 104(d) is a diagram for explaining a challenge bonus effect pattern for a small win.

In the first production mode, when the operation of the opening/closing member 2006 results in the provision of an opportunity to obtain a prize ball (bonus game), the production is extended until the period after the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped. A display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) at the time of extension with content can be selected.

For example, as shown in FIG. 104(a), when the extended display effect pattern (extended effect pattern) is selected based on the winning of the big win, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first changes the special symbols. In line with the start (based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set), the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started. However, after this, even if the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command (at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol) or the flag corresponding to the interval production command (entering the opening period) is set, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 The performance will continue without ending.

That is, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, the special symbols are stopped during the closed control period from when the special symbols are stopped based on the winning of the big win to when the big win game is started. The time (first closed control period with a predetermined length) until the time (here, 8 seconds) predetermined by the interval production timer expires, and the interval production timer The time from when the predetermined time (here, 8 seconds) expires until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n (see FIG. 151) (second closed control period with an indefinite length) I try to control it as

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when the extension display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) is selected based on the winning of the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 2, the time from when the special design is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) times up (the first closed control period with a certain length), with respect to the special design fluctuation time In the form of extending the display, a display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed. It should be noted that such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a particular character challenges a battle with an enemy character.

When the first closed control period having a fixed length passes and the control is performed as a second closed control period having an indefinite length, the contents of the presentation appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. is switched to a winning/losing indication performance in which win/losing information as to whether or not the result of the big winning lottery is a win (big win) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is specified. It should be noted that here, regarding the win-lose explicit effect, it will be performed as a big win effect that clearly indicates that the result of the big win lottery is a win (big win) that accompanies the operation of the condition device. It can be realized as a production in which the appearance of winning the battle is projected. In addition, considering that one display effect pattern consists of a display effect related to a big win lottery and a win-lose explicit effect in which the result of the effect appears, what is the extended effect pattern at the time of the big win according to this embodiment? It can be said that it is a performance pattern in which the performance contents are extended to within the second closed control period having an indefinite length after the first closed control period ends after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. .

After that, on the condition that the second closed control period having an indefinite length is still continued, the effect within the second closed control period is to hit the game ball relatively strongly. Control is performed so that an opening performance before the big win game prompting the start of the big win game by performing a right-handed game in which the game ball flows down to the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400.例文帳に追加do. As a result, when the player performs a right-handed game, the game ball hit into the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 passes through the valid gate 6010n, and a big win start command is set. becomes. As a result, when the second closing control period ends, a big win game is started in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened (see FIG. 92). At this time, the round indicator 648 lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

In addition, when the second closed control period having an undefined length ends in this way, and the big win game in which the big win opening 2003 is opened starts (a flag corresponding to the big win start command is set), for example, the liquid crystal Even if the performance (win/lose explicit performance or opening performance) appearing on the display device 1400 is in the midway stage, it is during the jackpot game indicating that the round game of the first round has started. Execute by forcibly switching to the production. However, on the other hand, as long as the game ball does not pass through the valid gate 6010n after the first closed control period with a fixed length ends, the second closed control period with an indefinite length ends (A flag corresponding to the big win start command is not set), so there is no compulsory switching to the performance during the big win game indicating the start of the round game of the first round.

According to such an extension effect pattern at the time of the big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length has passed from the time when the special symbol is stopped, at least if the operation handle part 410 is not operated, the valid gate Since the game ball does not pass through 6010n, the progress of the performance continues to stagnate in the performance before the start of the big hit game (the performance during the second closed control period). That is, in this case, the player does not operate the operation handle until he or she fully understands the meaning of the performance before the start of the big win game (the performance during the second closing control period). It is possible to keep stagnating the production progress in the previous production. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n by operating the operation handle portion, the effect before the start of the big win game ends and the next effect (during the big win game effect) is started. A self-paced performance that matches the pace of each player can be realized, in other words, a sense of speed in the progress of the performance can be realized as a performance that suits a wide range of audience regardless of age or sex. Become.

Furthermore, in such an extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit, as long as the effect does not progress from the effect before the start of the big win game (stagnation control of the effect by the peripheral control MPU 4140a), the main control MPU 4100a is indefinite. By controlling so that the second closed control period having a length of is not terminated, the game progresses and the big hit game (bonus game in which prize balls can be obtained) is executed. I try to avoid it. Therefore, from the player's side, by simply adjusting the speed at which the presentation progresses so as to match the player's own pace, the game appears to progress in accordance with the adjusted presentation speed. As a result, the player can enjoy the play at his/her own pace on the liquid crystal display device 1400 without worrying about the progress speed of the game.

In this way, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit is the second closed control period that appears in such a form that the closed control period is extended after the first closed control period having a certain length ends. It is a production pattern that is premised on continuing for the time of , and during the second closing control period, part of the production content in the same production pattern (explicit win-lose production) and the opening production before the big hit game ( A production prompting that a big hit game should be started by playing a right-handed game can be performed. Then, it is possible to end the second close control period at an appropriate timing according to each player's comprehension speed for these effects, and to start the big win game at an appropriate timing. A timer may be provided for the main control board so that the second close control period is not extended more than necessary. When a specified time elapses after the end of the first close control period, the main control board can forcibly set a jackpot start command. The main control board may decide by lottery whether or not to set the timer.

However, on the other hand, since such a second closing control period ends at least based on the operation of the operating handle portion 410 (a period with an indefinite length), for example Immediately after the first closing control period having a certain length is completed, if the operation handle part 410 is operated so that the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n, the win-lose explicit effect is performed during the effect. Alternatively, it may be possible to quickly proceed to the next effect (during the big hit game) without making the effect itself appear (skip the effect). Further, as described above, when the performance progresses quickly in this way, the game control itself also progresses quickly, and the big win game is started at an earlier stage. Therefore, even though the liquid crystal display device 1400 realizes a self-paced performance, for a veteran player, etc., the game can be progressed more quickly by skipping the performance or the like, thereby enjoying an efficient and stress-free quick game/performance performance. We are making it possible.

In particular, the time (game time) required for the opening effect in which the game explanation prompting the player to hit to the right after the win-lose explicit effect (jackpot effect) is performed is wasteful for the player in the second and subsequent games. It is often only time. However, according to the extension effect pattern at the time of the big hit, even if the time required for such an opening effect (game time) is prepared, if it functions only as a waste of time for the player, it is appropriately adjusted. , so that the performance and the game can be progressed more quickly. As a result, it is possible to provide each player with an effect and a game suitable for them.

By the way, the performance (game) is performed by cutting the performance time (the time of the winning and losing explicit performance) for showing win-loss information as to whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (big win) with the operation of the condition device. If the progress is made earlier, the final performance result (for example, whether or not the character wins the battle) in the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit does not fully appear, and even the opening performance is performed. Also, the performance during the big hit game (such as a round performance) suddenly appears. That is, in this case, the extended performance pattern at the time of the big win is terminated at an intermediate stage before the performance result appears sufficiently, so that even the opening performance can be omitted and the big win game can be started early. Become.

By the way, in the effect within the second closed control period having an indefinite length, first, a win-lose explicit effect is performed to clearly indicate that the result of the big win lottery is a win (big win) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. After that, an opening performance is performed to prompt the player to start the big win game by playing the right-handed game. However, after the opening effect is performed for a predetermined time (or while the opening effect is being performed), a full-length movie dedicated to the big win may be played. According to the second closed control period having an indefinite length, even if such a redundant performance is realized, there is no adverse effect such as a decrease in the interest in the game due to the delay of the performance. You will be able to expand the width of

In addition, during the second closing control period, acceptance of operation on predetermined operation means (operation button unit, etc.) is permitted, and the degree of expectation for the result of the game lottery is indicated based on the operation of the button. You may make it perform operation system production|presentation (For example, the production|presentation which suggests the expectation degree about the number of rounds of a big-hit game, the game state after a big-hit game, etc.). In other words, in this case, the player can realize an operation-related presentation that allows the player to operate at his/her own pace without worrying about the period of time during which the operation is permitted (the period during which the operation is permitted). become.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, at the time of winning the jackpot, lights up the round indicator 648 at the time when the first closed control period having a certain length from the stop of the special symbol ends. is controlled so that it does not occur. By canceling the same control on condition that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n after the first closed control period has ended, the round indicator is lit up. As a result, during the second close control period, it is possible to perform the win-lose explicit effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 while the round indicator is turned off. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to easily grasp the number of rounds in the big win game no matter how much performance stagnation occurs in the second closing control period.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(b), when the extended display effect pattern (extended effect pattern at the time of the small win) is selected based on the fact that the small win is won, the special symbol also appears. Interval production timer (here 8 seconds) after the is stopped by the time (first closed control period with a certain length) until the time up, form to extend the special symbol fluctuation time In this case, a display effect related to the jackpot lottery is performed. It should be noted that such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a particular character challenges a battle with an enemy character.

However, as described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, the closing control from when the special symbol is stopped based on the fact that the small hit is won until the small opening game (small game) is started As for the period (opening period), it consists only of the time (the first closed control period with a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval production timer (here, 8 seconds) times up. controlled to Therefore, in the extension effect pattern at the time of such a small hit, the first closed control period (here, 8 seconds) having a certain length passes, and the small open game (small game) is performed. At the time of starting, the content of the performance appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is a win-lose explicit performance in which win-lose information as to whether the result of the big win lottery is a win (big win) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is specified. I am trying to switch to It should be noted that here, regarding the win-lose explicit effect, it will be performed as a loss effect that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a win (jackpot) with the operation of the condition device, and for example, a specific character It can be realized as an effect or the like in which a state of losing a battle with an enemy character is projected. In view of the fact that one display effect pattern consists of a display effect related to a big win lottery and a win-lose explicit effect in which the result of the effect appears, the extension effect pattern at the time of a small win according to this embodiment is is an effect pattern in which the effect content is extended to the period in which the small opening winning game (small winning game) is performed after the first closing control period ends after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. I can say.

According to such an extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit, it is possible to shift to the display effect related to the next fluctuation (reservation digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after it is shown that the big win has been lost. become. Furthermore, by extending the content of the effect to the period during which the small opening per game (small winning game) is being performed, the liquid crystal display is displayed during the execution period of the small opening per game (small winning game). As much attention is directed to the display device 1400, the operation of the opening/closing member 2006 becomes less noticeable. That is, in this case, since the content of the performance progresses in the same manner as when the so-called high-expectation loss performance (the loss performance in which the opening and closing member 2006 does not operate) is performed, the loss performance pattern with respect to the extended performance pattern at the time of the big win. (Twin performance), and thus it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a win (minor win) that does not involve the operation of the conditional device.

Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operating mode of the opening/closing member 2006 is similar to or identical to the mode of operation of the opening/closing member 2006 when the small open winning game (small winning game) corresponding to the winning of such a small winning is performed. A big hit game in which the opening and closing member 2006 is operated in the operation mode of , and a hiding effect state (so-called hiding effect state using a small hit) on the premise of this are not prepared. That is, the extended effect pattern for the big hit when in the first effect mode (see FIG. 104(a)) and the extended effect pattern for the small hit (see FIG. 104(b)) are equipped with a small hit. It was made based on the technical idea (technical idea opposite to the conventional one) that it is difficult to grasp that it is a pachinko machine 1 that has been developed. In view of the fact that a series of behaviors at the time of a small win, such as fluctuation and stoppage, the first closing control period, and the opening of the big prize opening, appear also at the time of a big win, the contents of the production in each production pattern are extended. .

In addition, in the extension effect pattern at the time of the big hit and the extension effect pattern at the time of the small win according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Only after the timer (here, 8 seconds) times up (first closed control period) has passed, whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit (jackpot) with the operation of the condition device. Information is shown (explicit performance). However, with regard to these extension effect patterns, if the display effect related to the big win lottery is performed in such a way as to be extended to within the first closed control period, the same display effect can be performed within the first closed control period. Win/lose information as to whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a win (big win) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device may be shown in the effect portion appearing at . Even in such a case, it is possible to shift to the display performance of the next variation (reservation digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after at least showing that the big hit is a loss. In this case, in the winning/losing explicit effect at the time of the big win, there is a special effect at the time of the big win to congratulate the character for winning the battle while the fact that the character has won the big win has already been grasped, and a right-handed hit is encouraged. Along with the appearance of a performance for explaining the game, in the win-lose explicit performance at the time of the small win, it is already understood that the character has lost the big win, and the character is defeated in the battle and regrets it. A special effect etc. will appear at the time of the projected small hit.

In contrast to the extended effect pattern in the first effect mode, in the second effect mode, the operation of the opening/closing member 2006 provides an opportunity (bonus game) to obtain a prize ball. If so, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can select a challenge bonus effect pattern that indicates that the player has won the winning prize ball. This challenge bonus performance pattern is a display performance pattern in which not only a big win but also a small win are handled as one type (a win type) as a win that can obtain a prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2003.例文帳に追加

For example, as shown in FIG. 104(c), in the second effect mode, when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the winning of the jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts to change the special symbols. In accordance with this (based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set), the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started. Then, the display performance started in this manner is terminated (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the fluctuation of the special symbols.

However, this display effect does not show the lottery results related to the winning or losing of the big win, but the winning (big win or small win) that gives an opportunity to win a prize ball by opening the big winning opening 2003. It indicates whether or not it is done (hitting and losing effect on the challenge bonus). More specifically, when a big win or a small win is won, an opportunity to win a prize ball is given by opening the big prize opening 2003 within the special symbol fluctuation period. A specific display image will appear. In this case, the player cannot grasp the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player by opening the special prize opening 2003, but the player can obtain prize balls by opening the special prize opening 2003. The possible becomes the comprehensible.

After the specific display image appears in the winning/losing effect of the challenge bonus, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of the big win). A pre-start performance is performed for starting a challenge bonus performance as to how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the . As will be described later, the challenge bonus effect is the time (first closed control period with a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) times up. After that, it is started under the condition that the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n.

Here, in the pre-start effect for starting the challenge bonus effect, the operation amount of the operation handle portion (right Aiming at the valid gate 6010n by hitting game) and operation timing are explained.

In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, as such a pre-start effect, a countdown effect in which the operation timing of the operation handle section is indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 may be performed. In this countdown effect, for example, a countdown display for about 3 to 5 seconds is performed while explaining that the right-handed game is aimed at the valid gate 6010n, and when this countdown display changes to "0". When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate amount of operation, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the first closing control period ends.

Therefore, according to such a countdown effect, when the operation handle part 410 is operated as instructed in the same effect, the big win start command is set relatively early after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) times out. , the second closed control period is terminated, and the challenge bonus effect and the jackpot game (special bonus game) regarding the number of prize balls that the player can acquire are started early. Become so. At this time, the round indicator lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

That is, according to the progress of the effect in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the big hit, the time (undefined length) from when the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) times up until the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n 104(d)) is ignored from the point of view of the effect. It can be shortened as much as possible. That is, the above-mentioned countdown effect is made with this in mind, and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is terminated early to cut it. As in the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit (see FIG. 104(d)), only the first closed control period with a certain length appears as the interval period before the big win game (before the challenge bonus effect). It is designed to encourage the game progress (production progress) in the form. As a result, not only the big win but also the small win are treated as one of the types (type of win) of the win that can be obtained by opening the big prize opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus effect, the long opening is performed. In addition to the winning game and the middle opening winning game, it is possible to perform the performance display as to which game mode will appear, including the small opening winning game.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, at the time of winning the jackpot, lights up the round indicator 648 at the time when the first closed control period having a certain length from the time when the special symbol is stopped ends. is controlled so that it does not occur. And, by canceling the same control on condition that the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n after the end of the first closed control period, the round indicator 648 is lit up. As a result, before the challenge bonus effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player is notified that the big win has been won by lighting the round indicator 648 and the number of rounds in the big win game (special bonus game). It is possible to avoid being easily comprehensible.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, after the countdown display has changed to "0", the time from when the game ball is launched until it passes through the valid gate 6010n is shown in the following preceding presentation (not shown). By filling in the effect, the time from the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) to the time the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n (the second closing with an indefinite length control period) can be more effectively hidden.

Also, although illustration is omitted, in the countdown effect according to this embodiment, the timing at which the countdown display changes to "0" is slightly earlier than the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) times up (second 1 closed control period). According to such a countdown effect, at least part of the time from when the game ball is shot by the operation of the operation handle portion 410 until the same game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n is divided into the first closing control period and the second closing control period. Of the two closed control periods, the game is made possible so that it can be included as the time on the side of the first closed control period. (the amount included as the time on the first closed control period side) can be shortened. In this case, the preceding effect is started prior to the second close control period, and the effect that may straddle the first close control period and the second close control period is It will be positioned.

Here, as a series of production contents that lead from such a countdown production to a challenge bonus production through a preceding production, for example: In the countdown production, together with the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400, "countdown display is" Attack the enemy character by starting a right-handed game at the timing when it becomes 0! is displayed, and when the game ball passes through the effective gate 2500 (a flag corresponding to the jackpot start command is set), a challenge bonus effect showing the result of the attempted attack is started, and so on. , can be realized by

In addition, as a challenge bonus effect, for example, when an attack against an enemy character is evaded as a result of an attack, it indicates that it is a small release winning game, and the attack hits the enemy character but cannot defeat it. This can be realized by, for example, indicating that it is a mid-open win game at times, and indicating that it is a long open win game when the enemy character is defeated by an attack. Alternatively, when the enemy character is hit by an attack but cannot be defeated, it is indicated that it is either a medium-open winning game or a long-open winning game, and in the subsequent round production, the medium-open winning game or the long opening winning game is performed. You may make it specify whether it is either a winning game. According to such a challenge bonus effect, as long as the attack hits the enemy character, not only the amount of prize balls that can be obtained but also the possibility of a small hit is eliminated, which is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to dramatically increase the degree of expectation for the transition to a normal game state.

However, in such a challenge bonus performance pattern at the time of the big win, it is assumed that the operation handle part 410 is not operated for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown performance changes to "0". That is, in this case, the second closed control period having an indefinite length continues for a long time. It is more desirable to prevent the appearance of new effects, such as displaying as "", in order to reduce the player's interest in causing such a situation.

However, in the situation where the challenge bonus effect pattern has appeared, such a situation where the progress of the effect is stagnant is limited to the case where the big win is won, and the challenge bonus effect pattern ( This cannot occur in the case of FIG. 104(d)). That is, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by eliminating the possibility of performing a game per small opening while in a state of stagnant effects (non-effect state) in which no new effects are performed. In addition, the degree of expectation for the transition to a game state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

Regarding the countdown effect, it was decided that the countdown display would be realized. good.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(d), in the second effect mode, when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the winning of the small win, the peripheral control MPU 4140a In line with the start of pattern variation (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set), the liquid crystal display device 1400 is caused to start displaying. Then, the display performance started in this manner is terminated (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the fluctuation of the special symbols.

Similarly, in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small win, the prize ball is opened by opening the big winning hole 2003 in such effect (hit-loss effect related to the challenge bonus) performed during the fluctuation period of the special symbol. A specific display image will appear indicating that the winning opportunity is being awarded. As a result, although the player cannot grasp the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player by opening the large winning opening 2003, the player can acquire winning balls by opening the large winning opening 2003. It becomes possible to grasp what is said to be.

In addition, after the specific display image appears in the win-lose effect related to the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of the small win) is set, A pre-start performance is performed for starting a challenge bonus performance as to how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the big winning hole 2003.例文帳に追加

However, as described above, when the small hit is won, the special design is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special design is stopped until the small open per game (small hit game) is started. It consists only of the time (the first closed control period with a certain length) until the interval performance timer (here, 8 seconds) times up, and when the timer times up, the valid gate 6010n A small open per game (small bonus game) is started regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through (see FIG. 83).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in the small hit challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation of the operation handle (passage of the game ball to the effective gate 6010n) is originally necessary to advance the game and effect. Although it is not necessary, as a pre-start effect to start the challenge bonus effect, as in the case of the above-mentioned challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the big hit, the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up. Using the first closing control period, a countdown effect may be performed in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 .

According to the challenge bonus performance pattern at the time of the small hit, when the operation handle part is operated as instructed in the same performance, the challenge bonus performance pattern at the time of the big win leads from the countdown performance to the preceding performance to the challenge bonus performance. The challenge bonus effect will be started by the same series of effect contents. As a result, not only the big win but also the small win are treated as one type (type of win) of the win that can be obtained by opening the big prize opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus effect, the long opening is performed. In addition to the winning game and the middle opening winning game, it is possible to perform the performance display as to which game mode will appear, including the small opening winning game.

In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit, the countdown display is " It is conceivable that a situation may occur in which the operating handle portion is not operated for a long period of time even after the change to "0". In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment causes the liquid crystal display device 1400 to falsely start the preceding effect when the countdown display changes to "0", and after the false start of the preceding effect, the predetermined When the provisional rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed, the challenge bonus presentation is also falsely started.

In the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small hit, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs the countdown effect, the preceding effect, and the challenge bonus effect regardless of whether or not the operation system effect requiring the operation of the operation handle part is performed. A series of production contents leading to will appear falsely (false production). Therefore, the player confirms whether or not there is an operation on the operation handle and whether or not a game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n. It is possible to grasp that a game will be played with a small opening, thereby making it possible to show intellectual actions such as immediate interruption of the game.

Thus, the extended effect pattern in the first effect mode is, as described above, the presence of the small win itself by continuing the second closed control period with an indefinite length for a certain amount of time. It is a performance pattern aiming at concealment, and after extending the performance contents even within a first closed control period having a certain length which is also present in the performance pattern at the time of the small win, the performance contents at the time of the small win are extended. An opening performance before the big win game (a performance prompting the player to start the big win game by playing the right-handed game) is performed within the second closed control period which cannot exist in the performance pattern. On the other hand, the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode aims to handle even a small win as one of the wins by minimizing the appearance of the second closed control period having an indefinite length. It is a production pattern that has a certain length that exists in the production pattern at the time of the small hit, even as an opening production before the big hit game (a production that encourages the start of the big hit game by playing the right-handed game). It is designed to be completed within the first closed control period.

Such a performance premised on the existence of a second closed control period with an indefinite length by the extension performance pattern in the first performance mode and the challenge bonus performance pattern in the second performance mode. According to the structure (the production structure for differentiating the timing of prompting the right-handed game within the second closed control period), even if the display production pattern (the fluctuation time of the special symbol is the same) based on one production command, The length of the performance time required from the start of the variation of the special pattern (decorative pattern) to the start of the jackpot game can be greatly different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effects without changing the logic on the side of the main control MPU 4100a one by one.

By the way, according to the challenge bonus effect pattern for the big win (see FIG. 104(c)) and the challenge bonus effect pattern for the small win (see FIG. 104(d)), the display effect at the time of the win (specific An opportunity to obtain prize balls is provided so that at least a specific number (for example, a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be obtained when the display image) appears. With the players understanding that it will be done, it will be performed as a challenge bonus effect with a round lottery element, such as how many prize balls can be added as a bonus. .

Furthermore, when there is an increase in the number of prize balls, there is a possibility that a change to a game state that is advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability variation function or the time saving function is activated) is performed. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability is obtained by adding the winning probability (3/400) without operating the condition device to the winning probability (1/400) with the operation of the condition device. With (1/100), not only is it possible to pay out prize balls to the player (in other words, the opening/closing member 2006 operates), but it is also possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. will also be able to raise awareness. As a result, it is possible to prevent the repetitive display of only monotonous losing performances due to the probability of winning a big win (special win) which is set low, thereby suppressing the decline in the enjoyment of the game. .

Further, according to such a challenge bonus effect, even if a big win is lost, when a specific condition is satisfied, a display effect (a specific display image) at the time of winning appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. In spite of making the player conscious of the fact that prize balls can be paid out to the player and the change to a game state that is advantageous to the player, when the big winning hole 2003 operates, a big win is made. The liquid crystal display device 1400 can display a specific image that does not appear when a prize is won (such as an image that appears when a false performance such as a preceding performance or a challenge bonus performance is performed even though the operation handle is not operated). I'm trying That is, in this case, the period until the big prize opening 2003 is opened according to the winning of the big win can also function as a waiting effect period for whether or not the specific image (false effect) appears. In particular, when a specific image (false effect) appears, not only is there no change to a game state that is advantageous to the player, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is also determined by the same specific image (false effect). Since it is possible to win a significantly smaller number of prize balls than when the is not appearing, combined with such a large gap in the profits that the player can obtain, it is shown that the jackpot has been won. It is possible to further enhance the amusement of the game when the performance (stagnation performance from the first closing control period) appears.

Then, according to the configuration in which such two production modes are adopted, in the first production mode in which the extension production pattern can be selected, when executing the small opening per game (small winning game), for the player While an effect can be performed that does not make people aware that the prize balls can be paid out (in other words, that the opening and closing member 2006 operates), in the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, a small When the open winning game (small winning game) is executed, an effect can be performed to make the player aware that the prize ball can be paid out (in other words, the opening and closing member 2006 operates). . As a result, in the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, the probability is higher than in the first effect mode in which the extended effect pattern can be selected. With a higher probability ``1/100)'' added with the winning probability ``3/400''), an effect that makes the player aware that prize balls can be paid out appears, and such an effect mode , the execution probability of a bonus game (opening of the large winning opening 2003 by the opening/closing member 2006) in which prize balls can be paid out to the player without causing a change in the game state accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. It will be possible to realize a deeper production as if the is changing each time. In addition, after making it difficult for the player to notice that the pachinko machine 1 equipped with a small win in the first performance mode can realize such a performance, in the second performance mode, This is because the display effect is performed in which not only the big win but also the small win are handled as one of the types of wins that can be obtained by opening the big winning hole 2003 .

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) according to this embodiment, a first effect mode in which such an extension effect pattern can be selected and a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected. A forced mode control means is provided for creating a forced mode period in which any performance mode is forcibly determined and a change from the forcibly determined performance mode by a player's operation is not permitted.

For example, the pachinko machine 1 is forcibly set to the first performance mode for a first predetermined period (for example, a period until a predetermined period such as one month elapses) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall. , a second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has passed (for example, a period until a predetermined month and day such as the next one month has passed) is forcibly set to the second production mode. In the case where the control for creating the above-mentioned mode forced period is performed in the first month, the effect is performed so as to hide the fact that the small win is installed as described above, so that the big win is possible. It operates as a pachinko machine 1 capable of paying out prize balls to a player under the winning probability. On the other hand, for the next one month, an effect is performed in which a small win is treated as one of the types of wins that can be won by opening the big winning hole 2003. The pachinko machine 1 is operated as a pachinko machine 1 capable of paying out prize balls to a player with a high probability, and although the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with only one game specification, the initial first predetermined is achieved. Combined with the fact that it was difficult to notice the existence of a small hit during the period, it seems that another pachinko machine has newly started operation, not only with the contents of the performance on the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also with the game specifications related to the acquisition of balls. It becomes possible to give a player a good impression. After the second predetermined period has passed, the effect mode can be set according to the player's operation of the operating means during the demonstration effect.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 101, in the process of step S1233, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first selects the first production mode and the second production mode based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa. It is determined whether or not it is in a mode forced period in which one of the performance modes is forcibly determined. As a result, when it is determined that the first production mode is forcibly determined (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the first predetermined period after it is delivered to the hall), the second production is performed. When it is determined that the mode is forcibly determined (for example, when it is in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has passed), it is assumed that the change of the production mode by the player's operation is not permitted. (NO in step S1233), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is temporarily terminated. That is, in this case, while the demonstration effect is being executed (YES in step S1232), it waits for the variation pattern reception flag to be set (YES in step S1221).

On the other hand, based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa, it is determined that it is not in the above-mentioned mode compulsory period in which one of the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode is forcibly determined. (for example, when the second predetermined period has already passed), it is assumed that the change of the production mode by the player's operation is allowed (YES in step S1233), and then step S1234. process.

In the process of step S1234, it is determined whether or not the player has performed an operation to change the presentation mode. Here, the operation by the player is, for example, the operation of the operation button unit or the sub-button. It is conceivable to perform display control to make the selection screen of the production mode appear. And in this case, when such a selection screen is displayed, a specific production mode is selected by operating the sub button 372, and when the selected specific production mode is determined by operating the main button, the production mode (YES in step S1234), and a setting process for the effect mode is performed to change to the determined effect mode (step S1235).

The means to be operated by the player need not be the main buttons or sub-buttons of the operation button unit. Just do it. In addition, as the processing when there is an operation by the player, in addition to the control that causes a change in the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 (appearance of the selection screen, display at the time of selection, display at the time of decision, etc.), for example, transmission A player can be notified that the production mode has been switched by changing the production mode of a predetermined decorative member, such as by changing the color of light emitted from the rear surface of the game panel 600 (from blue to red, etc.). You may make it show against.

On the other hand, in the process of step S1221, when it is determined that the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) is in the ON state (set), the main control board 4100 side Assuming that a predetermined starting condition (NO in step S301) is established, the following steps S1222 to S1227 are performed to start the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400. FIG.

That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first turns off (resets) the fluctuation pattern reception flag (step S1222). Then, it is determined whether or not the game state flag indicates the normal external unfavorable game state (step S1223). This game state flag is operated to indicate the type of game state to be controlled after the big win game, for example, at the end of the big win game (for example, the big win display process (step S1230)).

Then, when the game state flag indicates that it is in the normal external unfavorable game state (YES in step S1223), next as the process of step S1224, the set state of the effect mode in the process of step S1235 or the built-in RTC 4140aa Based on time information such as calendar information and time information, it is determined whether or not the first effect mode is set. As a result, when the first effect mode is set forcibly during the period, or when the first effect mode is set during the period when the change of the effect mode by the player's operation is allowed. , it is determined that the first effect mode is set (YES in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225a is performed.

In the processing of this step S1225a, while referring to the effect pattern table in the setting state of the first effect mode, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a). Based on the information about the variation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined.

Next, a notice selection process is executed in which it is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect based on the notice determination random number (step S1226a). That is, depending on whether it is in the first effect mode or the second effect mode, not only the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the execution frequency of the notice effect and the contents of the effect change. In the selection process, an effect mode (announcement effect pattern) for the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number in the notice effect table when the first effect mode is set.

Then, display commands (notice commands) associated with the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice effect pattern in the first effect mode determined in this way are set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to "1". ” (step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) ends. That is, the display command and notice command set in this way are transmitted to liquid crystal control section 4150 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. Through control, a display effect of the content (extension effect pattern, etc.) indicated by the display command appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

On the other hand, in the process of step S1224, the second effect mode is set in the period in which the second effect mode is forcibly determined, or in the period in which the effect mode is allowed to be changed by the player's operation. When it is in the state, it is determined that it is not in the setting state of the first effect mode (NO in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225b is performed. In the process of step S1225b, while referring to the effect pattern table in the setting state of the second effect mode, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a). Based on the information about the variation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a), the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined. Next, in the advance notice effect table when the second effect mode is set, the effect mode (prediction effect (pattern) is determined (step S1226b).

Then, the display command (notice command) associated with the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice effect pattern in the second effect mode determined in this way is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to "1". ” (step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) ends. That is, the display command and notice command set in this way are transmitted to liquid crystal control section 4150 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. Through control, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

On the other hand, in the process of step S1223, when it is determined that the game state flag does not indicate that the game state is in the normal external unfavorable game state (NO in step S1223), although the details are omitted, the current game state A production pattern and a stop pattern are determined based on the corresponding production table (step S1229), and an appropriate notice including determination of whether or not to execute the notice production is executed in the advance notice production table corresponding to the current game state. An announcement selection process is executed in which an effect mode (announcement effect pattern) for the announcement effect is determined based on the determination random number (step S1230).

Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the notice effect pattern corresponding to the current gaming state thus determined is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to "1". ” (step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) ends. That is, the display command and notice command set in this way are transmitted to liquid crystal control section 4150 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. Through control, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 102, in the process of step S1225a, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) is read, and the variation pattern command is read. A corresponding production pattern is determined (step S1301). Here, in the effect pattern determination table in the first effect mode, one variation pattern command may be associated with a plurality of effect patterns (see FIGS. 108 and 109). Only one production pattern may be associated (see FIGS. 105 and 106). When a plurality of performance patterns are associated, one of the performance patterns is determined based on the result of a performance lottery using a predetermined random number for performance, or one of the performance patterns is determined based on the type of jackpot. It determines the pattern.

After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop pattern (symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbols are stopped is determined. That is, as will be described later, regarding the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1400, including the case where the above-mentioned extension effect pattern is adopted in which the display effect is not terminated when the special symbols are stopped, so as to match the fluctuation stop of the special symbols (confirmed (based on the stop command being set).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop pattern, an "extended effect pattern" and an "extended effect pattern, although not an extended effect pattern, can be prepared as a pair effect of the same extended effect pattern. A determination is made as to whether or not any of the "losing effect patterns" has been determined in the process of step S1301 (step S1302). As a result, when any one of these production patterns is determined, at the time when a predetermined stop pattern (such as a specific reach losing pattern) is determined (step S1303), the step S1225a (FIG. 101 reference) ends. In other words, in this case, during the opening period, under the condition that the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed with the stop symbols at the time of extension, the contents of the display effects centering on the story of the characters are extended (developed). It will appear continuously, and after that, the result as to whether or not the jackpot has been won will be clearly indicated.

On the other hand, a normal production pattern (Fig. 105(c), see FIG. 108) is determined, through the processing of steps S1304 to S1310, the stop symbol is determined according to the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the winning information command.

That is, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a big win based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (FIG. 99) (step S1304). As a result, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 101) is terminated at the time when the stop symbol exclusively for the jackpot is determined (step S1305).

Further, when the result of the big win lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1304), it is determined whether or not the result is a small win (step S1306), and when the result of the big win lottery is a small win. , a stop pattern dedicated to the small hit is determined (step S1307). However, when it is in the first effect mode, the effect commands are all associated with the extension effect pattern so that the existence of the small hit is hidden, so the process of step S1306 always , it is determined that the result of the big win lottery is not a small win, and next, as the process of step S1308, determination is made as to whether or not it is a display effect for forming a reach (high expectation loss effect).

Then, as a result, when the display effect is to form a reach, when the stop pattern of the reach losing is determined (step S1309), the processing of the step S1225a (see FIG. 101) is terminated, whereas the reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be displayed, the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 101) is terminated at the time when an irregular stop symbol that does not form a reach is determined (step S1310).

FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the second effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the process of step S1225b, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 99) is read, and the variation pattern command is read. A corresponding effect pattern is determined (step S1321). Here, also in the effect pattern determination table in the second effect mode, one variation pattern command may be associated with a plurality of effect patterns, or only one effect pattern. may be When a plurality of performance patterns are associated, one of the performance patterns is determined based on the result of a performance lottery using a predetermined random number for performance, or one of the performance patterns is determined based on the type of jackpot. It determines the pattern.

After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop pattern (symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbols are stopped is determined. That is, as described above, in the second effect mode, the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are adjusted to stop the fluctuation of the special symbols when a lottery result is obtained that enables winning of prize balls ( The stop pattern (specific display image) at the time of winning is stopped based on the fixed stop command being set.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, the jackpot is determined based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (see FIG. 97). A determination is made as to whether or not the result of the lottery is a win (big win or small win) that allows winning of prize balls (steps S1322 and S1324). As a result, when the result of the big win lottery is a win (big win or small win) that makes it possible to obtain a prize ball (YES in step S1322 or YES in step S1324), the opening of the big prize opening 2003 is confirmed. When the bonus challenge stop symbol is determined (step S1323), the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 101) is terminated. In addition, as the bonus challenge stop symbol, for example, a special symbol that is not a constituent element of the jackpot symbol combination is made to appear during the fluctuation, and the special symbol is included in the symbol combination at the time of stop. can do.

In this case, during the opening period after the bonus challenge stop pattern appears, for example, at least a specific number (for example, a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 balls in this embodiment)) can be obtained. With the players understanding that they will be provided with the opportunity to get prize balls as shown in the figure, there is a round lottery element such as how many prize balls can be added as a bonus. A certain challenge bonus production will be performed.

On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a hit (big hit or small hit) that allows winning of prize balls (NO in both steps S1322 and S1324), then step S1325 is processed. , a determination is made as to whether or not it is a display effect in which a reach is formed.

Then, as a result, when the display performance is such that reach is formed, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 101) is terminated at the time when the stop pattern of reach loss is determined (step S1326), while reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be displayed, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 101) is terminated at the time point when an irregular stop symbol that does not form a reach is determined (step S1327).

An example of a display effect that appears when such various processes (steps S1210 to S1240) are performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment will be described below. FIG. 105 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when one of the effect commands "01H" to "04H" shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), when the first effect mode is set, the fluctuation time shown in FIG. Supposing that the variation of the special symbol having Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a display effect a at the time of the big hit (for example, a specific mission a (whether the character A can defeat the enemy) or not, etc.) is started. Then, the extended effect pattern (effect command "01H") having the content of the display effect a started in this manner is maintained even in the situation where the timing t1 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Ta1 has come. , to continue without ending the display effect a (without making the specific mission a succeed or fail).

Further, when the extended effect pattern is dynamically displayed at the time of the effect command "01H", the variation of the decorative pattern is also started. However, as described above, the variation of the decorative symbols is fixed and stopped with the loss stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbols is stopped.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the extended stoppage mode during the variation time Ta1. Then, while the decorative design is temporarily stopped in the failure stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect a on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is required until the decorative design is fixed and stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Ta1. Concerning, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not character A, who has been attacked by an enemy and has fallen down, can stand up) is performed.

That is, in this case, the display effect a (no progress, failure) associated with the command "03H" shown in FIG. is continued, this functions as a ``post-development display effect a (a effect that leaves a chance to succeed in a specific mission a)''. Therefore, when this "developed display effect a" appears, the special symbols are seen from the player's side despite being in the first closed control period after the stop of the special symbol variation. It can be grasped as still being changed. In addition, even with regard to the decorative pattern on the liquid crystal display device 1400, it can be understood that the temporary stop state is maintained despite the fact that it is in the state after the final stop. It is possible to make it appear that there is still a chance to show that a big win has been won by overturning the loss stop mode.

However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (effect command "01H") having the contents of the display effect a is performed in a large display area (the center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Above, the variable display of decorative patterns should be performed only in a small display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (a place where it is difficult to pay attention to, such as an end portion of the display area) for such a display effect a. However, without paying attention to the movement of the decoration pattern, the player can grasp the result of the big win lottery by whether or not the specific mission a in the display performance a can be succeeded (the result is displayed by the character). more desirable to do.

That is, in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command "01H", in the first closed control period after the special symbol variation is stopped, the actual However, despite the fact that the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop succeeded (for example, character A who was attacked by the enemy and fell down stood up). Under this condition, the "developed display effect a" will appear. In this "advancement display effect a", the time up to the end timing t2 of the first close control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used to display a specific scene, such as a scene in which character A confronts an enemy again. An effect is performed as to whether or not the mission a can be successfully completed.

However, as will be described later, such a "developed display effect a (effect as to whether or not a specific mission a can be successfully completed)" during the first close control period on the side of the main control MPU 4100a is shown in FIG. This is also performed in the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (minor win) associated with the command "02H". Then, as described above, in order to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small win when in the first production mode, in the display production a (small win), the big win is lost. It is more desirable to shift to the next variation (holding digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after is shown.

Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big win) associated with the effect command "01H", a specific The success of mission a (character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, but a presentation as to whether or not specific mission a can be successful (character A launches an attack on the enemy and this succeeds) is shown. It is designed so that only the production (such as whether or not it is) appears. As a result, after the end timing t2 of the first closed control period, the big win explicit effect a can appear in the form of showing the success of the specific mission a, and is associated with the effect command "01H". The displayed effect pattern functions as "a win effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a".

However, as described above, in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit, after the first closed control period having a certain length ends, the closed control period is extended to have an indeterminate length. Two additional closed control periods are to appear. Then, within the second closing control period, part of the performance contents in the extended performance pattern at the time of the big win (big hit explicit performance a) and the opening performance before the big win game (right-handed game is performed to start the big win game (Direction prompting to do so) can be performed. When the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n as a result of operating the operating handle portion 410 at an appropriate timing according to each player's comprehension speed for these effects (timing tx), the second closing control period is entered. is finished, and the big win game and the performance during the big win game are started. Details of the effect during the jackpot game will be described later.

Also, as described above with reference to FIG. 104(a), the second closing control period from timing t2 to timing tx is terminated when the operating handle 410 is operated. (a period with an indefinite length), for example, the effective gate 6010n can be opened by operating the operation handle portion 410 immediately after the first closing control period with a fixed length has ended. If the game is played so that the big hit clear effect a and the opening effect are cut at that point, or the effect itself is almost not made to appear (skip the effect), the next effect (during the big win game effect) is forced. It will proceed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105(b), when the first effect mode is set, based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a wins a small hit, the (Here, it is assumed that the same time as the fluctuation time Ta1 is set.) Assuming that the fluctuation of the special symbol starts (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 , a display effect a at the time of a small win associated with the effect command “02H” (for example, whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded (character A can defeat the enemy), etc.) The dynamic display of the extension production pattern with content is started. When the extension effect pattern (effect command "02H") having the content of the display effect a thus started is also the extension effect pattern (see FIG. 105(a)) associated with the effect command "01H". Similarly, even in a situation where the timing t1 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Ta2, the display effect a is not ended (the specific mission a is neither successful nor failed). ) let this continue.

In addition, when the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (minor win) associated with the effect command "02H" is dynamically displayed, the decorative pattern is started to change. In addition, regarding the variation of the decorative symbols, at the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbols is stopped, the extension effect pattern (Fig. 105 (a) reference). It should be noted that, as for the stoppage mode of losing during the extension, a single display mode is adopted even though the lottery result of the big win differs between the big win and the small win, and the display mode is differentiated. has not been done.

Furthermore, while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the extended stoppage mode, the display performance on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is delayed until the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Ta2. As for a, a continuation expectation effect is performed as to whether or not this will continue (for example, whether or not character A, who has been hit by an enemy attack, can stand up). This is the same as the extension effect pattern (see FIG. 10(a)) associated with the effect command "01H".

That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H", in the first closed control period after the special symbol variation is stopped, In fact, although the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop succeeded (for example, character A who was attacked by the enemy and fell down stood up) Such an expectation Under the condition that the feeling is given, the “post-development display effect a” will appear. In this "developed display effect a", the time until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period on the main control MPU 4100a side is used to display, for example, a situation in which the character A confronts the enemy again. An effect is performed as to whether or not the specific mission a can be successfully completed.

Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t2 of the first closed control period arrives, there is no indication that the specific mission a has been successfully completed (character A defeats the enemy). A presentation appears as to whether or not the mission a can be successfully completed (a presentation of whether or not the character A launches an attack on the enemy and the attack succeeds). However, as described above with reference to FIG. After the first closed control period ends, a second closed control period having an indefinite length does not appear further by extending the closed control period. Therefore, after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t3 of the control for opening the large winning opening 2003 in the small opening winning game (small winning game) at the time of the production command "02H", specified A failing explicit effect a appears in the form of showing the failure of the mission a. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "02H" functions as "the lost effect pattern among the effect patterns having effect content a".

In this failure clear presentation a, for example, the character A's attack is dodged and the enemy escapes, and after that, the character A's frustrated appearance is shown, and so on, as a big winning loss presentation.

According to the extended effect pattern associated with such effect commands "01H" and "02H", from the start timing t0 of the special symbol to the opening end timing t3 of the big winning opening 2003 (or the second closing control period Since the time up to the end of the jackpot manifestation performance a within the period of time) functions as one performance for winning and losing the big win, the player can turn his attention to such a performance. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small win by opening the big prize opening 2003 when the loss manifestation performance a is performed.

In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, even if the player confirms that the big winning opening 2003 is open, it should be arranged so that no information can be obtained (an event that can be a reason for confirming the opening). ) is important. For example, in a pachinko machine 1 that can execute a big winning game that opens the big winning opening 2003 in the same or similar opening mode as the small opening winning game (small winning game), by confirming the opening, After that, it becomes possible to recognize that there is a possibility that the game state is changed under the condition of the operation of the condition device. In addition, since the player can obtain information that he or she has won a jackpot with a low winning probability and a small amount of balls thrown out, which may be an opportunity to quit the game, the opening of the big prize winning port 2003 is closely watched. It can also be a factor that makes you turn.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105(c), when the first effect mode is currently set, the main control MPU 4100a loses neither the big win nor the small win (genuine loss). ) is obtained, the variation in the special symbol having the variation time Ta3 shown in FIG. If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of failure associated with the effect command "03H" (for example, can a specific mission a be successfully completed (character A A dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern having contents such as (whether or not the player can defeat the enemy) is started. However, the display effect pattern (effect command "03H") having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is displayed at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the variation time Ta3. Terminate performance a without extending it (by failing a specific mission a).

More specifically, even when the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (no development) at the time of failure associated with the effect command "03H" is dynamically displayed, the variation of the decorative pattern is started. Also, in the variation of the decorative symbols, when the variation of the special symbols is stopped at the timing t1, the same decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the failure stop mode during the extension in order to stop the determination with the failure stop mode during the extension. ing. It should be noted that, as for the loss stop mode during the extension, a single display mode appears at the time of the big win, the small win and the loss.

In addition, while the decorative design is temporarily stopped in the extended failure stop mode, the display effect a on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is required until the decorative design is fixed and stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Ta3. Concerning the point that a continuation expectation effect is performed as to whether or not this will continue (for example, whether or not character A, who has been attacked by an enemy, can stand up). This is the same as the extension effect pattern (see FIGS. 105(a) and 105(b)) associated with the commands "01H" and "02H".

However, in the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (no development) at the time of failure associated with the effect command "03H", the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, A state in which character A, who has fallen after being attacked, does not stand up is shown), so that the player can grasp that a specific mission has failed. By preparing such a production pattern, the production pattern that continues after the timing t1 shown in FIGS. become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105(d), when the first performance mode is currently set, the main control MPU 4100a side wins neither the big win nor the small win. Based on the fact that a loss) was obtained, the variation in the special symbol with the variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of failure associated with the effect command "04H" (for example, can a specific mission a succeed (character A dynamic display of a non-extending display effect pattern having contents such as whether (or not) A can beat the enemy is started. However, although the display effect pattern (effect command "03H") having the content of the display effect a thus started is a non-extending display effect pattern, when the effect commands "01H" to "03H" To continue this without ending the display performance a (without making a specific mission a successful or unsuccessful) even in a situation where the timing t1 arrives due to the passage of the fluctuation time ta1 to ta3 of the special symbols. . Furthermore, when the display effect pattern (effect command "04H") is dynamically displayed, the variation of the decorative pattern is started, but the variation of the decorative pattern is continued without ending at the timing t1. It has become.

That is, in the case of a loss (pure loss), unlike the case of a big win or a small win, not only the time required to control the opening of the big prize winning port 2003 but also the big prize winning port 2003 is maintained in a closed state prior to opening. Since the first close control period is not prepared and the next variation is immediately started, it is difficult to extend the time required for the display effect a with respect to the variation time of the special symbol.

In this regard, for the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect command "04H", in the main control MPU 4100a, the fluctuation start timing t0 at the time of the small win to the opening end timing t3 of the big winning opening 2003 It is prepared so that it will be adopted when the fluctuation time Ta4 having a length matching the time is selected with reference to the time. Therefore, in this display effect pattern (display effect a), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a However, the special symbol is not stopped at the timing t1, and the display effect lasts longer.

That is, in this case, neither the special symbols nor the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped at the timing t1 with the loss stop mode at the time of extension, but among these symbols, the decorative symbols , similar to the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H", at the time of extension at the stage before the timing t1, which is only an intermediate stage, has passed with respect to the fluctuation time Ta4. Temporarily stop in the failure stop mode. Then, while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the failure stop mode at the time of extension, whether or not the display effect a on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued until the timing t1 arrives. (For example, whether or not the character A, who has been attacked by the enemy and fallen down, can stand up) is performed. In addition, in this mode of stopping the loss at the time of extension, a single display is made even though the big win lottery result and the change time are different between the big win, the small win and the loss (genuine loss). mode is adopted, and no distinction is made in the display mode.

Then, while the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in this way, the continuation expectation effect has succeeded (for example, the character A who has been attacked by the enemy and has fallen down stands up). As a result, the "post-development display effect a" appears. However, after this, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is not returned to the variable state again, and similarly to the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H", for the display effect a Then, in a small display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (a place that is difficult to pay attention to, such as an end portion of the display area), the stop state (“01H” to “03H” is a fixed stop, and “04H” is a stop) is maintained until timing t2.

In this "post-development display effect a", there is an effect as to whether or not the specific mission a can be successfully completed, such as by displaying, for example, a scene in which the character A confronts the enemy again within the variable time Ta4. done. However, as in the case of the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H", until the timing t2 comes, the state of success in the specific mission a (character A is the enemy) defeat) is not shown, and only the production of whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded (the production of character A launching an attack on the enemy and whether or not this will succeed) will appear. ing.

Then, after the timing t2, during the period until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the large winning opening 2003 in the small opening winning game (small winning game) at the time of the production command "02H", it seems that the specific mission a has failed. The loss explicit effect a appears in the form shown. In this failure manifestation effect a, as in the case of the effect command "02H", for example, the character A's attack is dodged and the enemy escapes, and after that, the character A's frustration is shown. It is performed as a failed performance. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "04H" functions as "the lost effect pattern among the effect patterns having effect content a".

Thus, in the first effect mode, based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, a specific effect content (display effect a) appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a specific loss effect pattern (effect command " 04H"), when a specific variation time (variation time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU 4100a side, within the determined specific variation time (variation time Ta4) Display control for a specific loss effect pattern is performed in such a manner that a specific effect content (display effect a) appears. In spite of this, based on the fact that the result of the jackpot lottery is a win, the specific performance content (display performance a) appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and for the above-mentioned specific loss performance pattern (performance command "04H"). When performing display control related to the winning production pattern (production command "01H"), the main control MPU 4100a side determines a fluctuation time (variation time Ta1) shorter than the specific fluctuation time (variation time Ta4). not only the determined short variation time (variation time Ta1) but also a longer time including at least a predetermined interval period (first closed control period, second closed control period) is set as the performance time. Then, the display control for the specific win effect pattern is performed in such a manner that the specific effect content (display effect a) appears within the effect time.

According to such an effect method, even in a predetermined interval period after the stop of the special symbols, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs the win-lose effect as to whether or not the win is won, and the opening effect. Become. Further, these effects can be appropriately cut to progress the effects and the game, so that the progress of the effects (game progress) at a good tempo can be realized. In addition, when a display effect pattern of such specific effect content (display effect a) appears, a noteworthy effect element has been added, such as whether or not the special symbol is stopped in the middle of the display effect pattern. When the stoppage is confirmed, it can be grasped that an opportunity to obtain a prize ball is given by opening the big winning hole 2003, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, by preparing the corresponding display effect pattern for the effect command "04H" for the extended effect pattern for the effect command "01H" and "02H", the "developed display effect a" It is possible to avoid the fact that the degree of expectation of a big hit when it appears will be set within a range restricted by the appearance ratio of the big win and the small win, and the small win is installed. Even under such a presentation system that makes it difficult to recognize the fact, it is possible to design a presentation with a higher degree of freedom as shown in FIG.

Further, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "04H", since the special symbols are fluctuating even after the timing t1, there is no problem even if the player confirms the fluctuation state of the special symbols. Absent. By preparing such a non-extended effect pattern in a mixed manner with the extended effect pattern, even if the stop state of the special symbol in the extended effect pattern is confirmed, the player can It will be possible to encourage awareness that may be misunderstood.

In addition, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "04H", the big winning hole 2003 is not opened when the clear effect "a" is being performed. There is no problem even if there is. By preparing such a non-opening clear loss effect a mixed with the clear loss effect a at the time of the above effect command "02H", the opening of the big winning opening 2003 in the clear loss effect a Even if is confirmed, it is possible to prompt the player to be aware that he or she may have misunderstood.

In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in the display effect pattern for the effect commands "01H", "02H", and "04H", the specific mission a (whether or not character A defeats the enemy) is not indicated. (whether the enemy is defeated or not) may be displayed. In other words, in this case, after the display of the same result appears, a clear big hit effect or a clear loss effect is performed. Most of the first close control period of is used for the display effect a, and after that, a big win loss effect appears, such as showing the character A feeling regretted, so that a big win loss effect is performed. It is possible to shift to the next variation (holding digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after being drawn.

By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when one of the effect commands "01H" to "04H" shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. is. Then, the player wins the big win with the winning probability of the big win without being conscious of the existence of the small win which is not particularly required for realizing such game performance (performance) in the first performance mode. You will enjoy the game of whether or not it will be done.

However, even if one of the effect commands "01H" to "04H" shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a A large winning opening 2003 by winning a small prize despite the fact that the effect command "01H" to "04H" from the side does not cause any change in the normal external unfavorable gaming state, let alone the contents of the command itself. Opportunity frequency of winning prize balls by opening the big winning hole 2003 is compared with the case of the first performance mode by positively adopting the display performance pattern of the performance contents on the premise of opening the . The playability (performance) as if the was greatly increased is realized.

That is, as shown in FIG. 105(a), when the second effect mode is now set, based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a wins the jackpot, the Supposing that the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the contents of the display effect a' at the time of the big hit associated with the effect command "01H". The dynamic display of the non-extended display performance pattern and the variation of the decorative pattern are started respectively.

However, the display effect a' in this second effect mode is different in content from the display effect a in the first effect mode. In the form of , the decorative pattern can be stopped and displayed with the bonus challenge stop pattern that makes it possible to grasp that the opening of the big prize mouth 2003 is confirmed) Display effect pattern (challenge It is prepared as a bonus production pattern). Therefore, the variable display of the decorative pattern is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in the central portion of the display area, which is likely to attract attention). As described above, in the second production mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative patterns, and a big win is achieved depending on whether or not the decorative patterns can be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop patterns appear on the predetermined pattern line. The player is made to grasp the result of the lottery.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the display form of the decorative pattern is made different between the first production mode and the second production mode. For example, the decorative pattern in the first production mode is a relatively small pattern image mainly composed of numbers, while the decorative pattern in the second production mode is displayed as a relatively large pattern image mainly composed of characters. Such as, in the second production mode, the decorative pattern is set as a display form that attracts more attention.

Then, in the non-extending display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "01H", during the fluctuation time Ta1 until the timing t1 arrives, for example, such a decorative pattern is stopped in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop pattern appears. At timing t1 when a display effect a' having contents such as a suitable character struggling to be displayed appears, and the variation of the special symbols is stopped, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by opening the big winning hole 2003.例文帳に追加The decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbols appear on a predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that the bonus challenge is stopped. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "01H" functions as "a win effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content a'".

In addition, when the decorative symbols are thus fixed and stopped in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbols appear, the liquid crystal display device 1400 utilizes the first closing control period to open the big winning port 2003 so that the player can As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect showing the number of winning balls that can be obtained, a countdown effect a' in which the operation timing of the operation handle part 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is provided. I am trying to do it.

Here, the countdown effect a' is, as described above, a countdown display of, for example, about 3 to 5 seconds, while explaining that the player is aiming at the valid gate 6010n in a right-handed game. If the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate amount of operation when the display changes to "0", the game ball will pass through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the first closing control period ends. .

Therefore, according to the countdown effect a′, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed in the same effect, the end timing t2 of the first closing control period is reached as shown in FIG. 105(a). As the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n immediately after the arrival of , the end timing tx of the second close control period comes earlier than in the case of the first effect mode. As a result, the challenge bonus effect as to how many prize balls the player can obtain is started relatively early after the end timing t2 of the first closed control period. In the production, it is indicated which opening mode (long opening winning game, middle opening winning game, small opening winning game) is used to open the big winning opening 2003 . That is, in this case, the player launches the game ball into the big winning opening 2003 not only in the big winning game but also in the small opening winning game (small winning game), thereby when the first production mode is established. Compared to , the game performance (performance performance) is realized as if the chance frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the big winning hole 2003 is greatly increased. Details of the effect during the jackpot game will be described later.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 104(c), in such a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, the operation continues for a long time after the countdown display in the countdown effect a' changes to "0". It is conceivable that a situation may arise in which the handle portion is not operated. That is, in this case, the second closed control period having an indefinite length continues for a long time. It is more desirable to prevent the appearance of new effects, such as displaying as "", in order to reduce the player's interest in causing such a situation.

However, in the situation where the challenge bonus effect pattern has appeared, such a situation where the progress of the effect is stagnant is limited to the case where the big win is won, and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small win described later ( 104(d) and 105(b)) cannot occur. That is, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by eliminating the possibility of performing a game per small opening while in a stagnant state of performance (non-performance state) in which no performance is newly performed. In addition, the degree of expectation for the transition to a game state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105(b), when the second effect mode is set, based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a wins a small hit, the (Here, it will be explained assuming that the same time as the timing t0-t1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device At 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display performance pattern having the contents of the display performance a' at the time of the small win associated with the performance command "02H" and the variation of the decoration pattern are started respectively.

Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "02H") having the content of the display effect a' started in this way also displays such a decorative pattern during the fluctuation time Ta2 until the timing t1 arrives. At timing t1 when the special symbols stop changing, a display effect a′ having a content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display with a stop display mode in which bonus challenge stop symbols appear appears. The decoration pattern is fixed and stopped in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop pattern appears on a predetermined pattern line so that the player can grasp that the winning ball can be obtained by opening the winning hole 2003.例文帳に追加becomes. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "02H" functions as "a win effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content a'".

However, as described above, when the small hit is won, the special design is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special design is stopped until the small open per game (small hit game) is started. It consists only of the time (the first closed control period with a certain length) until the interval performance timer (here, 8 seconds) times up, and when the timer times up, the valid gate 6010n A small opening per game (small per game) is started regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through (see FIG. 93).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "02H", the decorative pattern is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "01H". is determined and stopped in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the first closing control period is used to determine how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the big winning hole 2003. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect as to whether or not it is a thing, a countdown effect a' is performed in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400.例文帳に追加

That is, in the display performance pattern in the second performance mode, both the big win and the small win are handled in the same manner as the win to open the big winning hole 2003, and the variation of the decoration pattern is started. The contents of the performance from timing t0 to the time when the challenge bonus performance is performed are not distinguished, and when the operation handle is operated as instructed in the same performance, the countdown performance a' goes through the preceding performance (not shown) and the challenge bonus. The challenge bonus effect is started by the same series of effect contents as in the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the big hit (the effect command "01H") leading to the effect.
Therefore, not only the big win but also the small win are treated as one type (type of win) of the win that can be obtained by opening the big prize opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus effect, the long open win In addition to the game and the medium-open winning game, it is possible to perform an effect display as to which game mode will appear, including the small-open winning game. As a result, compared with the first performance mode, the game performance (performance performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning prize balls by opening the big winning hole 2003 is greatly increased. . In addition, among the long open per game, medium open per game, and small open per game, the small open per game ends in a relatively short time. As to whether or not a win has been won, a specific image that does not appear when a big win is won may be displayed in the performance within the first closed control period so that the player can grasp it.

In this way, regarding the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "02H", even though it is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, ・A small hit is a no-chance loss in which an opportunity to win a prize ball is not given ( An extended effect pattern in the first effect mode treated in the same way as the effect pattern at the time of a pure loss (effect command "04H"), and a small hit as a high chance hit that gives an opportunity to win a prize ball ( It is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns (challenge bonus effect pattern) in the second effect mode treated in the same way as the effect pattern at the time of the big hit (the effect command "01H"). . In other words, in this case, the performance information related to the win or loss is appropriately reversed on the side of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. be able to make it happen.

Further, in the small opening winning game (small winning game), not only a small amount of prize balls (in this embodiment, about 40 to 50 balls) can actually be acquired by the player as a privilege, Since there is no transition to a game state more advantageous to the player than before the small opening winning game (small winning game) is performed, the interest in the game is lowered despite the operation of the opening/closing member 2006.例文帳に追加It can be said that care must be taken in handling it in terms of game settings because it may be possible. Therefore, conventionally, when mounting a small hit, a big hit game is performed with the same behavior as a small open winning game (small winning game), and after that, a specific function that functions to shift to an advantageous game state Winning species are first prepared, and in a situation where a small opening winning game (small winning game) is performed, the player is made aware of the possibility of a big winning game corresponding to the winning of the specific winning species. By doing so, it is a major premise to maintain the interest in the game when the small open winning game (small winning game) is performed. However, even in such a conventional gaming machine, when a specific type of winning is won, the winning probability of the big win is set to be extremely low in the normal game state. Nevertheless, it is unavoidable that the loss of interest in gaming due to the inability to obtain prize balls corresponding to this low probability (lowering of interest in gaming due to the difference between the probability of a big win and the actual probability of a big win). rice field.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the small win is installed, the big win game is performed with the same behavior as the small open winning game (small win game), and after that, the game state is advantageous. In that there is no specific winning species that functions to shift to It is vastly different.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when small wins are installed, the winning types of big wins (big win A, jackpots B to E) are prepared. When opening the big winning slot 2003, first, the lottery result that confirms the opening of the big winning slot 2003 in the big win lottery (jackpot A expected to win a large amount of balls, medium amount of balls expected to win) big hits B to E, and small wins expected to yield a small amount of balls) have been obtained (a challenge bonus pattern appears regardless of the type of win I have to). As a result, when it is shown that the same lottery result has been obtained, the player can grasp that at least a small amount of balls can be obtained. , After that, a challenge bonus effect is further performed on how much balls can be accumulated (from acquiring a small amount of balls to medium or large amounts). I'm trying

Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that a change to a game state that is advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability variation function or the time saving function is activated) is performed. In this regard, in this embodiment, depending on how many balls are put out (jackpot A expected to win a large amount of paid balls, or jackpots B to E expected to win a medium amount of paid balls), The degree of expectation for the operation of the probability variation function (probability of transition to the game state in which the probability variation function operates) is made different. That is, in this case, a challenge is made as to which one of a plurality of types of operation modes prepared so as to have different probabilities of changing to a game state in which the probability variation function is activated after the opening of the big winning hole 2003 will appear. It comes to function as a bonus production. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability is obtained by adding the winning probability "3/400" without operating the condition device to the winning probability "1/400" with the operation of the condition device. With "1/100", not only is it possible to pay out prize balls to the player (in other words, the opening/closing member 2006 operates), but it is also possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. will also be able to raise awareness.

In addition, in this embodiment, the degree of expectation for the operation of the probability variation function (the degree of probability variation expectation at the time of jackpot A) is 100% when it is accumulated until a large amount of balls can be obtained, and at least medium The degree of expectation for the operation of the probability variation function (probability variation expectation in the case of jackpots A to E) is 82% when it is accumulated until it is possible to acquire a large amount of balls, and it is possible to acquire a medium amount of balls. The expectation for the operation of the probability variation function when it is added up to 61.7% (probability variation expectation at the time of jackpot B to E) is 61.7%, and the expected value of the number of balls that can be acquired is high. The more you are in the situation, the higher your expectations of variability will be.

Moreover, according to such a challenge bonus effect, since the default effect state is that a small amount of balls can be obtained, a large amount of balls can be obtained in accordance with the winning of a big win. Unlike conventional gaming machines in which whether or not is a basic game (basic performance), even if a small open per game (small per game) in which a small amount of balls can be obtained is performed, Since the large winning opening 2003 is only opened in accordance with the default presentation state, the decline in the interest in the game is suppressed. Furthermore, when in the second production mode, the appearance probability of the winning production (probability of entering the challenge bonus ) is also set to a higher probability (a higher probability that the probability of winning a small win is added to the probability of winning a big win). It is also avoided that the interest is reduced.

In order that the challenge bonus performance pattern that realizes such game performance and performance is provided in the second performance mode, a lottery for a small hit is performed in the first performance mode as well. When a small win is won, fluctuation times Ta2 to Td2 having a length corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation times Ta1 to Td1 at the time of winning a big win can be selected. However, in the first performance mode, a small win is not necessary, and a display performance as to whether or not a big win has been won is basically performed based on the probability of a big win. Therefore, in the first effect mode, it is convenient to realize a display effect that makes it difficult for the player to notice that the pachinko machine is equipped with a small win. When the effect method in which the result of the big winning lottery appears at the time of stop is simply adopted, the opening period for executing the small opening winning game (small winning game) and the subsequent opening period of the big winning opening 2003 after the stop of the special symbol. is conspicuous, and the amusement interest may decrease.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in the first production mode, at the timing t1 (at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbols), the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set. However, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued without ending. Also, when entering the first closed control period, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set at timing t1, but the peripheral control MPU 4140a indicates that the big winning opening 2003 is open. The setting of the same command is ignored without switching to the interval presentation, and the display presentation in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued. Then, at the timing t2 when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is changed so that the result of the big win lottery results in a win accompanied by the operation of the condition device. It is executed in the form of switching to a win-lose explicit effect showing win-lose information as to whether it is a (big hit) or an opening effect.

That is, in this case, the effect at the time of the above-mentioned small hit is positioned as one effect that appears when the big win is lost, and after the special symbol is stopped, the first closing when executing the small open winning game (small winning game) By performing the control period and the subsequent opening period of the big prize winning opening 2003, the display performance of the next fluctuation (reservation digestion of the special symbol) relatively quickly after the big win is shown. will be able to move to As a result, the performance progresses in the same manner as the so-called loss performance with high expectations, so that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a win (minor win) without the operation of a conditional device. This makes it difficult for the player to notice this fact, and furthermore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the operation of the opening/closing member 2006 in accordance with the winning of the small prize.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a first effect mode and a second effect mode are prepared, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in particular, operates in the first effect mode as described above. and a second performance mode, and creates a mode compulsion period during which a player's operation is not allowed to change from the forcedly determined performance mode. ing. Then, after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall, the first specified period (for example, one month) is forcibly set to the first performance mode, and the first specified period has passed. The control for creating the mode compulsory period is performed so as to forcibly determine the second effect mode for a second predetermined period (for example, the next one month).

According to such a mode compulsion period, the hall side hides this from the player even though the small win is installed by the appearance of the extension performance pattern as described above during the first predetermined period. At the same time, a winning display is performed in the display performance on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the probability of winning a big win of ``1/400'', so that a prize ball is given to the player under the probability of winning a big win of ``1/400''. Pachinko machine of the first game specification that can pay out is started to operate (first refurbishment opening). In addition, during the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has passed in this way, the opening of the big winning opening 2003 enables the acquisition of prize balls, not to mention the big win, but also the small win as one type. Since the above-mentioned challenge bonus effect pattern to be handled appears, the existence of the small win is made difficult to be noticed during the first predetermined period, and the winning probability of the big win is higher than "1/400". Based on the probability of “1/100”, the winning display is performed in the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 .

That is, in this case, prize balls can be paid out to the player under a higher probability of "1/100" obtained by adding the probability of winning the small prize of "3/400" to the probability of winning of the big prize of "1/400". It becomes possible to start operation of a new pachinko machine of the second game specification (second refurbishment opening). As a result, although the pachinko machine 1 is originally equipped with only one game specification, another pachinko machine is newly operated in which not only the contents of the performance in the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the game specification related to obtaining balls are different. Such an impression can be given to the player.

Furthermore, according to such a mode forcing period, unless it is determined that the predetermined date (first predetermined period) has not elapsed and the specific date and time (second predetermined period) has not elapsed. , Not only is change control from the first performance mode not permitted, but also some performance modes (second performance modes) out of the plurality of performance modes are still hidden without appearing. will be performed. In other words, in this case, as time passes after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall, the production function that has been hidden until then is gradually revealed, and finally, it is revealed. Since it becomes possible to selectively use the different presentation function by the player's operation, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game for a long period of time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105(c), when the second effect mode is currently set, the main control MPU 4100a loses neither the big win nor the small win (genuine loss). ) is obtained, the variation in the special symbol having the variation time Ta3 shown in FIG. Assuming that it is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 dynamically displays a non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a' at the time of failure associated with the effect command "03H". , and variation of the decorative pattern, respectively.

Then, the non-extending display effect pattern (effect command "03H") having the content of the display effect a' started in this way also displays such a decorative pattern during the fluctuation time Ta3 until the timing t1 arrives. , and a display performance a' having contents such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop pattern appears appears. However, at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbols is stopped, the decoration symbols are fixed and stopped in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbols do not appear on the predetermined symbol line despite the efforts of the appropriate characters. Become (challenge bonus production pattern). As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "03H" functions as "the lost effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a'".

In this way, the display effect pattern for the effect command "03H" is the "non-extending display effect pattern" regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the same display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, the effect pattern (effect command "01H") having the contents of the display effect a at the time of the big hit in which the "extended effect pattern" is adopted. Since there is a gap in the performance time at , the performance pattern having the content of the display performance a at the time of the big win cannot function as a performance pattern at the time of losing, and the content of the display performance a develops. As described above, it functions only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a' at the time of the big hit at the time of the effect command "01H" is the "non-extending display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern). )”, there is no difference in the performance time between the production pattern (production command “01H”) and the production pattern (production command “ 01H") at the time of failure (a production pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line). Also, as described above, when in the second effect mode, the "non-extending display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a' for the small hit at the time of the effect command "02H" is also displayed for the effect for the win. Since it appears as a pattern (a production pattern in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined pattern line), this production pattern (production command "02H") also has a production pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined pattern line) at the time of failure. It will function as a production pattern that does not appear on the pattern line).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105(d), when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a side wins neither the big win nor the small win. Based on the fact that a loss) was obtained, the fluctuation in the special symbol with the fluctuation time Ta4 shown in FIG. is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 dynamically displays a non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c' at the time of failure associated with the effect command "04H". is started.

That is, regarding the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "04H", when the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "03H" is in the first effect mode, it has the contents of the display effect a at the time of the big hit. In view of the fact that it is not possible to function as an effect pattern in the event of a failure with respect to the effect pattern (effect command "01H"), this (effect pattern in the case of failure in the first effect mode) is compensated for. It is prepared. Therefore, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "04H" adopts the "non-extended effect pattern" when in the second effect mode, contrary to the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "03H". The performance pattern (performance command "01H") having the contents of the display performance a' at the time of the big win will be delayed, and the performance having the contents of the display performance a' at the time of the big win will be generated. It cannot function as an effect pattern when the pattern fails.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation time Tc1 for the variation number "9" and the variation time Tc2 for the variation number "10" shown in FIG. A variable time having the same length as the variable time Ta4 is prepared. That is, in this case, when in the second effect mode, the later-described display effect pattern (see FIG. 106(a)) having the content of the display effect c' at the time of the big hit at the time of the effect command "09H" is "non- Since it appears as an extended display effect pattern, there is no difference in the effect time with the same effect pattern (effect command "09H"). Therefore, regarding the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "04H", when in the second effect mode, a non-display effect having the contents of the display effect c' at the time of failure associated with the effect command "04H" is displayed. By starting the dynamic display of the extended display effect pattern, the effect pattern (bonus It functions as a performance pattern in which the challenge stop pattern does not appear on the predetermined pattern line.

In addition, in the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "04H") having the contents of the display effect c' started in this way, such a decorative pattern is displayed, for example, during the fluctuation time Ta4 until the timing t3 arrives. , and a display performance c' having a content such as a suitable character struggling to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears appears. However, at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbols is stopped, the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbols do not appear on the predetermined symbol line despite the efforts of the appropriate characters. Become.

As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H" appears when a specific loss variation time Ta4 is selected, but the effect command (variation time) from the main control MPU 4100a is different. It can function as each loss display performance pattern for the big win display performance patterns of two types of performance contents a and c', and functions as a loss display performance pattern for any of these big win display performance patterns. Whether to perform is selectively set based on which one of the first production mode and the second production mode is set. As a result, the production commands "01H" and "09H" at the time of the two big hits are changed to the production command "01H" at the time of the big hit in the first production mode and in the second production mode. , "09H", the appearance probability of the losing display performance pattern prepared for the big win display performance pattern can be changed.

More specifically, regarding the big hit effect pattern of the effect command "01H", in the first effect mode, the effect command "04H" at the time of losing is adopted as the losing effect pattern. In the production mode of (1), the production command "04H" at the time of losing is never adopted as the losing production pattern. Therefore, with respect to the big win effect pattern of the effect command "01H", the appearance probability of the losing effect pattern of the effect command "04H" is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. In addition, regarding the big hit effect pattern of the effect command "09H", in the first effect mode, the effect command "04H" at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern, but the second effect command is not used. In the performance mode, the performance command "04H" at the time of failure is adopted as the failure performance pattern. Therefore, as for the big win effect pattern of the effect command "09H", the appearance probability for the losing effect pattern of the effect command "04H" is higher in the first effect mode than in the second effect mode. As a result, a wide variety of display effect patterns with different expectations can be made to appear according to the effect mode without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side one by one (see FIG. 107).

In addition, the reason why such a special effect can be realized is that, for one losing fluctuation time Ta4, by using as the effect time until the stop timing t3 of the special symbol, the effect command in which the length of each effect is adjusted. The jackpot performance pattern of '09H' and the variation time Ta1 shorter than the loss variation time Ta4 are added to each other by using at least the first closed control period after the pattern stoppage as the performance time. This is because the jackpot effect pattern (first effect mode) of the effect command "01H" whose length is adjusted is prepared. That is, by preparing the jackpot performance patterns whose performance time is adjusted in this way, the jackpot performance patterns of performance commands "01H" and "09H" with different fluctuation times Ta1 and Tc1 are associated with one loss fluctuation time Ta4. When this loss variation time Ta4 is selected, the peripheral control MPU 4140a side can determine which of the performance contents a and c' is to appear. Furthermore, even if such a first closing control period is added as an effect time, when a win (big win or small win) for opening the big winning hole 2003 is won, a certain length of time is given regardless of the type. It is also important to set a long time (e.g., 8 seconds) in order to realize such a special performance including the performance pattern at the time of a small hit.

FIG. 106 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when one of the effect commands "09H" to "11H" shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), when the first effect mode is currently set, the fluctuation time shown in FIG. Supposing that the variation related to the special symbol with Tc1 is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect c (for example, a specific mission c (whether the character C can beat the enemy) or not) is started. Then, the extended effect pattern (effect command "09H") having the contents of the display effect c started in this way is maintained even in the situation where the timing t3 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Tc1 has come. , to continue the display presentation c without ending it (without making the specific mission c succeed or fail).

That is, as described above, the variation time Tc1 for the variation number "9" shown in FIG. 96 is not prepared as a variation time having the same length as the variation time Ta4 for the variation number "4". However, when the first effect mode is set, such an "extended effect pattern" is adopted, so there is a difference in the effect time with the same effect pattern (effect command "04H"). is what occurs. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when in the first effect mode, the effect relevance (jackpot effect pattern, losing effect) with the display effect pattern at the time of the variation number "4" pattern) is not provided.

Further, when the extended effect pattern is dynamically displayed at the time of the effect command "09H", the variation of the decoration pattern is also started. However, the variation of the decorative symbols is fixed and stopped with the loss stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbols is stopped.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the extended stoppage mode during the variation time Tc1. Then, while the decorative design is temporarily stopped in the losing stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect c on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is required until the decorative design is fixed and stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Tc1. Concerning, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character C who has been attacked by the enemy and fallen down can stand up) is performed.

That is, in this case, the display effect c (no progress, failure) associated with the command “11H” shown in FIG. is continued, this functions as "post-development display effect c (effect that leaves a chance to succeed in specific mission c)". Therefore, when this "developed display effect c" appears, the special symbols are seen from the player's side despite being in the first closed control period after the stop of the special symbol variation. It can be grasped as still being changed. In addition, regarding the decorative pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1400, it can be grasped that the temporary stop state is maintained despite the fact that it is in the state after the final stop. It is possible to make it appear that there is still a chance to show that a big win has been won by overturning the loss stop mode.

However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (effect command "09H") having the content of the display effect c is performed in a large display area (the center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Above, the variable display of decorative patterns should be performed only in a small display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (a place where it is difficult to pay attention to, such as an end portion of the display area) for such a display effect c. However, it is more preferable to allow the player to grasp the result of the big win lottery by whether or not the specific mission c in the display performance c can be succeeded without paying attention to the movement of the decorative pattern.

That is, in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command "09H", in the first closed control period after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, the actual However, although the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop succeeded (for example, the character C who was attacked by the enemy and fell down stood up). Under this condition, the "post-development display effect c" will appear. In this "post-development display effect c", by utilizing the time up to the end timing t4 of the first close control period on the main control MPU 4100a side, for example, a scene in which the character C confronts the enemy again is displayed. An effect is performed as to whether or not the mission c can be successfully completed.

However, as will be described later, such a "developed display effect c (effect of whether or not a specific mission c can be successfully completed)" during the first close control period on the side of the main control MPU 4100a is shown in FIG. This is also performed in the extension effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (minor win) associated with the command "10H". As described above, in order to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small win when in the first production mode, the display performance c (small win) indicates that the big win is lost. It is more desirable to shift to the next variation (holding digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after is shown.

Therefore, in the extension effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command "09H", a specific The success of mission c (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, but a presentation as to whether or not a specific mission c can be succeeded (character C launches an attack on the enemy and succeeds). It is designed so that the production (such as whether or not it is) appears. As a result, after timing t4 when the opening effect ends, the big win explicit effect c can appear in the form of showing that the specific mission c has been successfully completed, and the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "09H". functions as "a winning effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c".

However, as described above, in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit, after the first closed control period having a certain length ends, the closed control period is extended to have an indefinite length. Two additional closed control periods are to appear. Then, within the second closing control period, part of the performance contents in the extended performance pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit performance c) and the opening performance before the big win game (right-handed game is performed to start the big win game (Direction prompting to do so) can be performed. When the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n as a result of operating the operating handle portion 410 at an appropriate timing according to the player's comprehension speed for these effects (timing ty), the second closing control period is entered. is finished, and the big win game and the performance during the big win game are started. Details of the effect during the jackpot game will be described later.

Also, as described above with reference to FIG. 104(a), the second closing control period from timing t4 to timing ty ends based on the operation of the operating handle portion 410. (a period with an indefinite length), for example, the effective gate 6010n can be opened by operating the operation handle portion 410 immediately after the first closing control period with a fixed length has ended. If the game is played so that the big hit c, the opening effect, etc. will be cut at that point, or the effect itself will not appear (skip the effect), and the next effect (during the big hit game) will be forced. It will proceed.

On the other hand, now, when the first effect mode is set, based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a wins a small hit, the fluctuation time Tc2 shown in FIG. 96 (here, the fluctuation time is set at the same time as Tc1) starts (timing t0). A dynamic display of an extended effect pattern having the contents of display effect c at the time of a small hit (for example, whether or not a specific mission c can be succeeded (whether the character C can defeat the enemy) or not) is displayed. be started. When the extension effect pattern (effect command "10H") having the content of the display effect c thus started is also the extension effect pattern (see FIG. 106(a)) associated with the effect command "09H". Similarly, even in a situation where the timing t3 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Tc2, the display effect c is not ended (the specific mission c is neither successful nor failed). ) let this continue.

Also, when the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (minor win) associated with the effect command "10H" is dynamically displayed, the decorative pattern is started to change. In addition, regarding the variation of the decorative symbols, at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbols is stopped, the extension effect pattern (Fig. 106 (a) reference). In addition, although the lottery result of the big win is different between the big win and the small win, the losing stop mode at the time of extension adopts a single display mode, and the display mode is distinguished. As mentioned above, this is not done.

Furthermore, while the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the extended stoppage mode, the display performance on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is delayed until the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Tc2. Regarding c, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not character C, who has been attacked by an enemy and fallen down, can stand up) is performed as to whether or not this will continue. This is the same as the extension effect pattern (see FIG. 106(a)) associated with the effect command "09H".

That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command "10H", in the first closed control period after the special symbol variation is stopped, In fact, although the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop succeeded (for example, character C standing up after being attacked by the enemy) Such expectation Under the condition that the feeling is given, the “post-development display effect c” will appear. In this "post-development display effect c", the time until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period on the side of the main control MPU 4100a is used to display, for example, a scene in which the character C confronts the enemy again. An effect is performed as to whether or not a specific mission c can be successfully completed.

Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t4 of the first closed control period arrives, there is no indication that the specific mission c was successful (the character C defeats the enemy), and the specific mission c is not shown. An effect appears as to whether or not the mission c can be successfully completed (the effect that the character C launches an attack on the enemy and whether or not this will succeed) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. After the first closed control period ends, a second closed control period having an indefinite length does not appear further by extending the closed control period. Therefore, after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period, until the end timing t5 of the control for opening the large winning opening 2003 in the small opening winning game (small winning game) at the time of the production command "10H", specified The failing clear effect c appears in the form of showing the failure of the mission c. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "10H" functions as "the lost effect pattern among the effect patterns having effect content c".

In this loss manifestation performance c, for example, an attack by the character C is dodged and the enemy escapes, and after that, the character C shows a state of chagrin. done.

According to the extended effect pattern associated with such effect commands "09H" and "10H", from the start timing t0 of the special symbol to the opening end timing t5 of the big winning opening 2003 (or the second closing control period Since the time up to the end of the jackpot manifestation c in the above) functions as one of the effects for winning and losing the big win, the player can turn his attention to such a production. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small win by opening the big winning hole 2003 when the losing clear performance c is performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(c), when the first effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a loses neither the big win nor the small win (genuine loss). ) is obtained, the variation in the special symbol having the variation time Tc3 shown in FIG. If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect c (for example, can a specific mission c be successfully completed (character C A dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern having contents such as (whether or not the player can defeat the enemy) is started. However, the display effect pattern (effect command "11H") having the contents of the display effect c started in this way will be displayed at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the variation time Tc3. Terminate performance c without extending it (by failing a particular mission c).

More specifically, even when the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of failure associated with the effect command "11H", the variation of the decorative pattern is started. Also, regarding the variation of the decorative symbols, when the variation of the special symbols is stopped at the timing t3, the same decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the failure stop mode during the extension in order to be fixed and stopped with the failure stop mode during the extension. ing.

In addition, while the decorative design is temporarily stopped in the failure stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect c on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is required until the decorative design is fixed and stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Tc3. Concerning the point that a continuation expectation effect is performed as to whether or not this will continue (for example, whether or not character C, who has been attacked by an enemy and has fallen down, can stand up, etc.) This is the same as the extension effect pattern (see FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b)) associated with the commands "09H" and "10H".

However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of failure associated with the effect command "11H", the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, A state in which the character C who has been attacked and fallen down is not standing up is shown), so that the player can grasp that the specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, the effect pattern that continues after the timing t3 shown in FIGS.

In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, even in the display effect patterns for the effect commands "09H" and "10H", until the timing t4 arrives, whether the specific mission c is successful or not. Whether or not (whether or not character C defeats the enemy) is not indicated. or not) may be displayed. That is, in this case, after the display of the same result appears, a clear big hit effect or a clear loss effect is performed. Most of the first close control period of is used for the display effect c, and after that, a big win loss effect appears, such as the character C showing a state of regret, etc., and a big win loss effect is performed. It is possible to shift to the next variation (holding digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after being drawn.

By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when one of the effect commands "09H" to "11H" shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. is. Then, the player wins the big win with the winning probability of the big win without being conscious of the existence of the small win which is not particularly required for realizing such game performance (performance) in the first performance mode. You will enjoy the game of whether or not it will be done.

However, even if one of the effect commands "09H" to "11H" shown in FIG. 96 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a The production commands ``09H'' to ``11H'' from the side, not to mention the contents themselves, but there is no change in the normal external unfavorable gaming state. Opportunity frequency of winning prize balls by opening the big winning hole 2003 is compared with the first performance mode by positively adopting the display performance pattern of the performance contents premised on the opening of the . The playability (performance) as if the was greatly increased is realized.

That is, as shown in FIG. 106(a), when the main control MPU 4100a is set to the second effect mode, the main control MPU 4100a wins the jackpot. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the contents of the display effect c' at the time of the big hit associated with the effect command "09H". The dynamic display of the non-extended display performance pattern and the variation of the decorative pattern are started respectively.

However, the display effect c' in this second effect mode is different in content from the display effect c in the first effect mode. In the form of , the decorative pattern can be stopped and displayed with the bonus challenge stop pattern that makes it possible to grasp that the opening of the big prize mouth 2003 is confirmed) Display effect pattern (challenge It is prepared as a bonus production pattern). Therefore, the variable display of the decorative pattern is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in the central portion of the display area, which is likely to attract attention). As described above, in the second production mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative patterns, and a big win is achieved depending on whether or not the decorative patterns can be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop patterns appear on the predetermined pattern line. The player is made to grasp the result of the lottery.

Then, in the non-extending display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern) at the time of the effect command "09H", during the fluctuation time Tc1 until the timing t3 arrives, for example, such a decorative pattern is displayed, and the bonus challenge stop pattern is changed. At timing t3 when a display performance c' having contents such as a suitable character striving to stop display with the appearing stop display mode appears, and the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the large winning opening 2003 is opened. The decoration pattern is fixed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop pattern appears on a prescribed pattern line so that the player can grasp that the chance of winning the prize ball is given. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "09H" functions as "a win effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content c'".

In addition, when the decorative symbols are thus fixed and stopped in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbols appear, the liquid crystal display device 1400 utilizes the first closing control period and opens the big winning opening 2003 to win the game. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect c' indicating how many prize balls are possible, a countdown effect c' in which the operation timing of the operating handle portion is indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed. I am trying to do it.

Here, this countdown effect c' is, as described above, a countdown display of, for example, about 3 to 5 seconds, while explaining that the player is aiming at the valid gate 6010n in a right-handed game. If the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate amount of operation when the display changes to "0", the game ball will pass through the effective gate 6010n immediately after the first closing control period ends. . However, as will be described later, this countdown effect c' has a different degree of expectation from the countdown effect a' described above. I have to.

Therefore, according to the countdown effect c', when the operation handle is operated as instructed by the effect, the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives as shown in FIG. 106(a). After that, the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n immediately, so that the end timing ty of the second close control period comes earlier than in the case of the first effect mode. As a result, the challenge bonus effect as to how many prize balls the player can obtain is started relatively early after the end timing t4 of the first closed control period. In the production, it is indicated which opening mode (long opening winning game, medium opening winning game, small opening winning game) is used to open the big winning opening 2003 . That is, in this case, the player launches the game ball into the big winning opening 2003 not only in the big winning game but also in the small open winning game (small winning game), thereby the first performance mode. As compared with , the game performance (performance performance) is realized as if the chance frequency of winning prize balls by opening the big winning hole 2003 is greatly increased. Details of the effect during the jackpot game will be described later.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 104(c), in such a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, the operation is continued for a long time after the countdown display in the countdown effect c' changes to "0". It is conceivable that a situation may arise in which the handle portion 410 is not operated. That is, in this case, the second closed control period having an indefinite length continues for a long time. It is more desirable to prevent the appearance of new effects, such as displaying as "", in order to reduce the player's interest in causing such a situation.

However, in the situation where the challenge bonus effect pattern has appeared, such a situation where the progress of the effect is stagnant is limited to the case where the big win is won, and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the small win described later ( 104(d) and 106(b)) cannot occur. That is, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by eliminating the possibility of performing a game per small opening while in a stagnant state of performance (non-performance state) in which no performance is newly performed. In addition, the degree of expectation for the transition to a game state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), when the second effect mode is set, based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a wins a small hit, the (Here, it will be explained assuming that the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display performance pattern having the content of the display performance c' at the time of the small win associated with the performance command "10H" and the variation of the decoration pattern are started respectively.

Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "10H") having the contents of the display effect c' started in this way also displays such a decorative pattern during the fluctuation time Tc2 until the timing t3 arrives. , a display effect c′ having a content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop pattern appears, and at timing t3 when the variation of the special pattern is stopped, the bonus is displayed. A decorative symbol is fixed and stopped in a stop display mode in which a challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "10H" functions as "a win effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content c'".

However, as described above, when the small hit is won, the special design is stopped for the closing control period (opening period) from when the special design is stopped until the small open per game (small hit game) is started. It consists only of the time (first closed control period with a certain length) until the interval performance timer (here, 8 seconds) times up, and when the timer times up, the valid gate 6010n Regardless of the presence or absence of the passage of the game ball to the small open per game (small hit game) is started (see Figure 93).

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "10H", the decorative pattern is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "09H". is determined and stopped in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the first closing control period is used to determine how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the big winning hole 2003. As an effect before the start of the challenge bonus effect as to whether or not it is a thing, a countdown effect c' is performed in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400.例文帳に追加

That is, in the display performance pattern in the second performance mode, both the big win and the small win are handled in the same manner as the win to open the big winning hole 2003, and the variation of the decoration pattern is started. The contents of the performance from timing t0 to the time when the challenge bonus performance is performed are not distinguished, and when the operating handle part 410 is operated as instructed in the same performance, the countdown performance c' starts with the preceding performance (not shown) and then the challenge. The challenge bonus effect is started by the same series of effect contents as in the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern (the effect command "09H") at the time of the big win leading to the bonus effect. Therefore, not only the big win but also the small win are treated as one type (type of win) of the win that can be obtained by opening the big prize opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus effect, the long open win In addition to the game and the medium-open winning game, it is possible to perform an effect display as to which game mode will appear, including the small-open winning game. As a result, compared with the first performance mode, the game performance (performance performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning prize balls by opening the big winning hole 2003 is greatly increased. . In addition, among the long open per game, medium open per game, and small open per game, the small open per game ends in a relatively short time. As to whether or not a win has been won, a specific image that does not appear when a big win is won may be displayed in the performance within the first closed control period so that the player can grasp it.

As described above, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "10H" is treated as a no-chance loss in which the chance of winning a prize ball is not given even though the display effect pattern is based on one effect command. The extended production pattern in the first production mode and the small hit are treated as a high-chance hit that gives an opportunity to win a prize ball (similarly to the production pattern at the time of the big win (production command "09H")). It is selectively executed as one of the non-extending display effect patterns in the 2 effect mode. In other words, in this case, the performance information related to the win or loss is appropriately reversed on the side of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. be able to make it happen.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(c), when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a loses neither the big win nor the small win (genuine loss). ) is obtained, the variation in the special symbol having the variation time Tc3 shown in FIG. Assuming that it is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 dynamically displays a non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c' at the time of failure associated with the effect command "11H". , and variation of the decorative pattern, respectively.

Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "11H") having the content of the display effect c' started in this way also displays such a decorative pattern during the fluctuation time Tc3 until the timing t3 arrives. , and a display performance c' having a content such as a suitable character struggling to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears appears. However, at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbols is stopped, the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbols do not appear on the predetermined symbol line despite the efforts of the appropriate characters. Become (challenge bonus production pattern). As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "11H" functions as "the lost effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c'".

In this way, the display effect pattern for the effect command "11H" is the "non-extended display effect pattern" regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the same display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, the effect pattern (effect command "09H") having the contents of the display effect c at the time of the big hit in which the "extended effect pattern" is adopted. Since there is a gap in the performance time at , the performance pattern having the content of the display performance c at the time of the big win cannot function as the performance pattern at the time of losing, and the content of the display performance c develops. As described above, it functions only as a halfway effect pattern that ends at the halfway stage.

On the other hand, when it is in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c' at the time of the big hit at the time of the effect command "09H" appears as the "non-extended display effect pattern". , with respect to the performance pattern (performance command "09H") having the content of the display performance c' at the time of the big win without causing any deviation in the performance time between the same performance pattern (performance command "09H"). It will function as a production pattern (a production pattern in which the bonus challenge stop pattern does not appear on the predetermined pattern line) at the time of loss. In addition, as described above, when in the second effect mode, the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect c' at the time of the small hit at the time of the effect command "10H" is also the effect at the time of the win. Since it appears as a pattern (a production pattern in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined pattern line), this production pattern (production command "10H") is also a production pattern at the time of failure (a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined pattern line). It will function as a production pattern that does not appear on the pattern line).

Thus, the display effect pattern for the effect command "09H" corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command "01H" shown in FIG. The display effect pattern corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 105(b), and the display effect pattern for the effect command "11H" is shown in FIG. 105(c). This corresponds to the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “03H”. c series) function as production patterns having almost the same role.

However, in the effect content c series (effect commands “09H” to “11H”), a display effect pattern corresponding to the effect command “04H” in the effect content a series (effect commands “01H” to “04H”) is prepared. not That is, even in the effect content c series, if a display effect pattern corresponding to the effect command "04H" is prepared, in the first effect pattern, the display effect pattern corresponding to the effect command "09H" will not be displayed. Although this can be effectively functioned as a failure display performance pattern, in the second performance pattern, it cannot be functioned as a failure display performance pattern with respect to the display performance pattern at the time of the performance command "09H". Therefore, despite the relatively long time, there is a display effect pattern exclusively for losing, in which the combination of jackpot symbols does not appear, and there is concern that this may reduce the interest in the game. It is.

Therefore, when in the first production mode, for the winning production pattern at the time of the production command "09H", the production pattern at the time of losing (genuine loss) where a specific condition is not satisfied is adopted as the losing production pattern. Only the production pattern when a specific condition is satisfied (the display production pattern at the time of production command "10H") functions as the only existence that replaces the production pattern at the time of the loss (pure loss). will come to That is, in this case, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), unlike the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”), “developed display production c” appears. There is no choice but to set the degree of expectation for a big hit at the time, within a range restricted by the appearance ratio of a big hit and a small hit. However, the effect content c of the effect content c series (effect commands “09H” to “11H”) is given a longer time than the effect content a of the effect content a series (effect commands “01H” to “04H”). , and the degree of expectation for the big hit is executed as an effect with a degree of expectation higher than that of the effect content a. Therefore, regarding the degree of expectation of a big win when the "developed display effect c" appears, even within a range restricted by the appearance ratio of the big win and the small win, this is required as a proper value which will be described later. Setting up is relatively easy.

In addition, for the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "04H" in the effect content a series (effect commands "01H" to "04H"), when in the second effect mode, the effect content a By making it function as a losing effect pattern for the hit effect pattern of the effect content c series (effect command "09H", "10H") instead of the winning effect pattern of the series (effect command "01H", "02H") As described above, it is possible to avoid the existence of a display effect pattern exclusively for the loss in which the big hit symbol combination does not appear. Therefore, in the production content c series (production commands "09H" to "11H"), when in the second production mode, the hit production patterns (production commands "09H", "10H") are prepared. A failure effect pattern appears with a higher probability by the addition of the selection probability of the display effect pattern of the effect command "04H" than the ratio of the loss effect pattern (effect command "11H").

Although the details are omitted, each display effect pattern associated with the effect command "05H", "06H", "07H", and "08H" of the effect content b series shown in FIG. A display having the same mode as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 105(a) to (d)) associated with the effect commands "01H", "02H", "03H", and "04H" of the a series. It is set as a production pattern. Furthermore, the respective display effect patterns associated with the effect commands "12H", "13H", and "14H" of the effect content d series shown in FIG. It is set as a display effect pattern having the same aspect as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 106(a) to (c)) associated with "10H" and "11H" respectively. That is, each display effect pattern associated with the effect command "05H", "06H", "07H", and "08H" of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 96 and the effect content d shown in FIG. The effect relationships between the display effect patterns respectively associated with the effect commands "12H", "13H", and "14H" of the series are the effect commands "01H", "02H", "01H", "02H", Each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 105(a) to 105(d)) associated with "03H" and "04H" respectively, and effect commands "09H", "10H" and "11H" of the effect content c series 106(a) to 106(c)) that are associated with each other.

FIG. 107(a) is a table showing the degree of expectation for a big hit in the first production mode for each production content series, and FIG. 107(b) is a table showing the challenge in the second production mode. It is a table showing the degree of expectation for entering a bonus and the like for each production content series. In addition, since the numerical value indicating the probability is rounded off to the first decimal place, the total probability value of each element may not be 100%.

According to the setting mode of the display effect pattern, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation for a big win when the display effect pattern appears is ``0.5%'', the degree of expectation for a big win when the display effect pattern of the effect content b appears is ``1.5%'', and the degree of expectation for the big win when the display effect pattern of the effect content b appears is ``1.5%''. The degree of expectation for a big win when the display effect pattern appears is ``13.7%'', and the degree of expectation for a big win when the display effect pattern of the effect content d appears is ``33.1%''. It should be noted that when the display effect pattern of the effect content e appears, the degree of expectation for the big win is "100%", so this is omitted in the table. In the display effect pattern of the effect content e, a definite effect that a big win is won appears regardless of the effect mode.

In addition, regarding the degree of expectation for a big hit (the degree of expectation that a winning effect will appear) when each display effect pattern that can appear in the first effect mode is in a developed stage, when the effect content a after development appears. The degree of expectation for a big hit is "1.3%", the degree of expectation for a big hit when the performance contents b after development appear is "3.7%", and the degree of expectation for a big hit when the performance contents c after development appears is The degree of expectation is "25%", and the degree of expectation for a big hit when the performance content d after development appears is "72.7%".

On the other hand, the expectation level for entering the challenge bonus, which is the expectation level for the appearance of the winning effect in the second effect mode, is determined when the display effect pattern of the effect content a' appears, as shown in FIG. 107(b). is "7.9%", and the expected degree of challenge bonus entry when the display effect pattern of the effect content b' appears is "11.8%", and the display of the effect content c' The expectation level for entering the challenge bonus when the performance pattern appears is "15.4%", and the expectation level for entering the challenge bonus when the display performance pattern of the performance content d' appears is "10%".

That is, as described above, only the display effect patterns of the effect contents a and b among the effect contents a to d are the big hit effect patterns set as the extended effect patterns (effect command "01H", effect command "05H ”), a non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “04H”, effect command “08H”) that can function as a failure effect pattern only when in the first effect mode is prepared. Then, in the second effect mode, the non-extended display effect patterns (effect command "04H", effect command "08H") prepared in this way are used as the hit effect pattern (effect command " 09H", production command "10H") and a winning production pattern of production content d' (production command "12H", production command "13H").

According to the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands "04H" and "08H", when the first effect mode is set, a winning effect is expected to appear, including the effect contents a and b after development. Although the degree of expectation for a big hit is low, the appearance probability of each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b is increased (with respect to each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d). It is possible to avoid the repetition of only unpredictable display performance patterns. Furthermore, for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d, including the effect contents c and d after development, the appearance probability is low, but a winning effect appears in each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d. The degree of expectation (expectation for big win) is increased (with respect to each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b), thereby increasing the interest in the game when the specific display effect pattern (the effect contents c and d) appears. It will be possible to improve

Conversely, the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands "04H" and "08H" are reversed and used as display effect patterns for the effect contents c and d series when in the second effect mode. As a result, the appearance probability of the production contents c and d series is increased by that much (manipulation for appearance probability). As a result, it becomes possible to reduce the difference in the probability of appearance and the degree of expectation that a winning effect will appear among the effects a to d compared to the case of the first effect mode. It is possible to realize a wide variety of performances with greatly different performance contents without changing them one by one.

Moreover, when in the second production mode, the difference between the production contents in terms of the degree of expectation for the appearance of the winning production (the degree of expectation for entering the challenge bonus) is determined by the display production associated with the production commands "04H" and "08H". In addition to the pattern being used as a display effect pattern for the effect content c, d series, the opening of the big winning hole 2003 makes it possible to obtain a prize ball, and not only the big win but also the small win is one of the types. (Operation to reduce the disparity in expectations for the appearance of the hit effect).

According to the effect mode in the second effect mode, the display effect patterns of the effect contents a' to d' are relatively likely to appear regardless of the types of the effect contents a' to d'. Become. In addition, the probability of entering the challenge bonus effect (probability of executing the winning effect) in which the opportunity to win the prize ball is confirmed is also equalized compared to when it is in the first effect mode (here, the effect content a' to d' within a range of ±10%), and the above-mentioned difference in appearance probability is filled, and even if any of the production contents a' to d' appears, the game will be played. Players are more likely to expect to be given the opportunity to win prize balls.

In this regard, when in the second production mode, when entering (executing) the challenge bonus production, the "large winning opening 2003 is opened in any manner (long opening per game, medium opening per game, small opening per game). Since the effect is characterized by the effect such as "Will it be done?", it is better to make all of them relatively easy to appear than the case where one of them appears unevenly as a display effect pattern of the effect contents a' to d'. This is more preferable in terms of suppressing a decline in amusement.

That is, as shown in FIG. 106(b), in the display effect patterns of the effect contents a' to d' according to this embodiment, the effect content a' has the highest appearance probability of the game per long and medium opening. It becomes smaller, and gradually becomes larger in the order of the performance contents b', c', and d'. In addition, regarding the appearance probability of the game per small opening, the effect content a' is the largest, and the effect content b', c', and d' gradually decrease in order. Therefore, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a' appears, the probability that the big winning hole 2003 will be opened by the small opening per game is certainly high, but at least a small amount of prize balls (in this embodiment, , about 40 to 50) are determined to be obtainable. You will be able to enjoy it as a performance. In addition, when the display effect pattern of the effect content d' appears, the probability of opening the large winning opening 2003 by the long opening winning game or the medium opening winning game is increased by the small opening winning game. Since it is higher than the probability of winning, it is not confirmed that at least a small amount of prize balls can be obtained as a privilege, but rather, the large winning opening 2003 is opened by the long opening winning game or the medium opening winning game. It will function as a production of color such as whether it is opened or not. The display effect patterns for the effect contents b' and c' function as effect effects with colors between the display effect pattern for the effect content a' and the display effect pattern for the effect content d'. , the display effect pattern of the effect content b′ has a darker color effect than the display effect pattern of the effect content a′, and the display effect pattern of the effect content c′ has a color effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content d′. is getting darker. Therefore, since the display effect patterns of the effect contents a' to d' are all relatively likely to appear, the player can enjoy the effects of various colors.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the above-described operation for reducing the difference in the degree of expectation for the appearance of the winning effect between the contents of the effect compared to the case of the first effect mode is the expectation for the appearance of the winning effect. The degree relationship is reversed according to the production mode. More specifically, as shown in 106(a) and (b), when in the first effect mode, the expectations of the effect contents b and c are "1.5%" and "13%" respectively. 0.7%”, which is lower than the expectation level “33.1%” of the effect content d. They are "11.8%" and "15.4%", respectively, and are higher than the expectation level "10%" of the effect content d'. With such a setting mode as well, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with significantly different effects without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side one by one.

However, when the effect pattern of the effect content d' appears, the expectation (probability) of executing the winning effect (challenge bonus effect) is certainly higher than when the effect pattern of the effect contents b' and c' appears. Although it is low, if the challenge bonus effect is entered, the large winning opening 2003 is opened by the long and medium opening per game at a higher probability than in the effect patterns of the effect contents b' and c'. , it is easy to acquire a large number of balls. Therefore, the effect patterns of the effect contents b' and c' and the effect pattern of the effect contents d' differ depending on the player's preference, and such various colors are provided according to the display effect pattern. As a result, the decrease in interest in gaming is suppressed.

Next, an example of an effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when control for opening the big winning opening 2003 is being performed based on the result of the big winning lottery in the normal external unfavorable gaming state will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 96, 105(a) and 106(a), according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the types of jackpots (jackpot A to jackpot E ), the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 (here, the control for the big win game) is started while the contents of the performance are not different according to the type and the type is kept secret without being shown. It will happen. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first effect mode, the period during which the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 is performed is used to determine the type of jackpot and the period. An effect that can show the game state after the end is performed.

That is, as described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state is either jackpot A or B, after the jackpot game ends, both the time saving function and the probability variation function are activated. It will be controlled to the probability variable external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when either one of the jackpots A and B is won, the liquid crystal display device 1400 first indicates that the jackpot has been won as the jackpot indication effects a to d, and then opens and closes for a long time and for a medium time. A performance showing information (a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.) on the amount of balls to be played (big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) as to whether the big winning hole 2003 is opened with the opening/closing pattern is performed (during the big win game). As for the performance during the jackpot game related to the amount of balls to be put out, it is necessary that the jackpot is won in the jackpot manifestation performances a to d even if it is not performed after the performance of the jackpot manifestation performances a to d. may be displayed together with (simultaneously displayed) information related to the amount of paid balls (type of jackpot).

In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state is one of the jackpots C to E, after the jackpot game ends, the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability variation function also operates) in which the time saving function does not operate It is controlled to a normal external unfavorable gaming state that does not occur, or a variable probability external unfavorable gaming state in which the probability variation function operates). Then, as the effect state after the end of the jackpot game, it is controlled to a predetermined hiding effect state in which whether or not the probability variation function is in operation is kept secret. Therefore, when one of the jackpots C to E is won, the liquid crystal display device 1400 first indicates that the jackpot has been won as the jackpot manifestation effects a to d, and then either the jackpots A or B. By performing an effect different from the effect during the jackpot game when ( Directed during a big hit game). In addition, since the open mode of the middle open per game is adopted when the jackpots C to E are won, only showing that one of the jackpots C to E has been won does not include information about the amount of balls to be put out. will be shown. Also, regarding the performance indicating that any of the big wins C to E is won, even if it is not performed after the big win explicit performances a to d are performed, the big wins are given in the big win explicit performances a to d. It may also be displayed (simultaneously displayed) when clearly indicating that the prize has been won.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 96, 105(a), and 106(a), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second production mode, there is an opportunity to open the big winning opening 2003. The contents of the performance are not different according to the type of winning (big win A to big win E, small win), and the type is kept secret without being shown, and the opening of the big winning port 2003 is controlled ( Here, control for a big hit game or a small hit game) is started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second effect mode, the type of winning (big winning, small winning, The above-described challenge bonus effect is performed in which the type of win or big win) and the game state after the end of the relevant period can be displayed.

That is, in the open production (challenge bonus production) in the second production mode, first, how the large winning opening 2003 is opened (long opening per game, medium opening per game, small opening per game) Information (big bonus, regular bonus, small bonus, etc.) on the amount of balls to be played is displayed. As a result, when it is indicated that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the long opening winning game (big bonus), it is naturally indicated that the state is controlled to the probability variable external advantage game state based on the winning of the big win A. will be Further, when it is indicated that the large winning opening 2003 is opened by the small opening winning game (small bonus), it is naturally indicated that the winning of the small winning is won and the game state is not changed. becomes.

However, when it is indicated that the large winning opening 2003 is opened by the middle open winning game (regular bonus), a battle effect by a predetermined character is further performed as an open effect. As a result, when the character wins in the same battle presentation, it is indicated that the game is controlled to the variable probability external advantage game state based on the winning of the big win B.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the character is defeated in the same battle production, it is indicated that one of the jackpots C to E has been won, and after the opening production (jackpot game) is completed, the time is reduced. It is controlled to an external disadvantageous gaming state in which the function does not operate (normal external disadvantageous gaming state in which the probability variation function does not operate, or probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state in which the probability variation function operates). Then, as the effect state after the end of the jackpot game, it is controlled to a predetermined hiding effect state in which whether or not the probability variation function is in operation is kept secret.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined latent effect state is limited to a period until the special symbols change a specific number of times (for example, 10 times). For example, when a specific enemy character is not encountered until the end of the same period, it is indicated that the player is in a variable probability external disadvantageous gaming state, while when the specific enemy character is encountered during the same period, a predetermined battle effect is performed. I'm trying When the character wins in this battle presentation, it is indicated that the character has won a jackpot, and when the same character is defeated, it is indicated that the character is in the normal external unfavorable game state, thereby waiting for the end of the same period. The latent effect state is terminated without

In this way, according to the latent effect method in which the current game state is shown until the period until the special symbols change a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) at the latest, the player will eventually It becomes easy to purely enjoy whether the player is in the game state, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the game state being kept secret for a long period of time even though the time saving function does not operate.

By the way, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 105(a), the effect command "01H" shown in FIG. , but as shown in FIG. 108, in addition to the "extended effect pattern", it seems that the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a is also associated. can be

That is, in this case, when the effect command "01H" shown in FIG. 96 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs the "extended effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a and the display effect a. , and the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern.

Here, as a method for selecting the "extended effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a and the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a, for example, (a) random numbers A method of selecting either an "extended effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a or a "non-extended display effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on and (b) based on the type of the jackpot won in the jackpot lottery, an "extended effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a and a "non-extended display effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a. , etc., or a method combining (a) and (b).

Among these, when the method (b) is adopted, how many of the values of random numbers that can be obtained are associated with the "extended effect pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern", respectively. In the first effect mode, an "extended effect" having the content of the display effect a when the effect command "01H" shown in FIG. The appearance probabilities of "pattern" and "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of display effect a are determined. Regarding the setting of such appearance probability, it is better to set the expectation of a big hit higher when the "extended effect pattern" appears than the "non-extended display effect pattern". It is more desirable in terms of entertaining the performance.

Also, in the case of adopting the method of (b), when a specific winning type (for example, jackpot A) is won, a dynamic Display is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400 . According to such an effect technique, at the timing t1, at least the win-loss result of a specific winning type (for example, jackpot A) is displayed.

For example, when a jackpot pattern (a jackpot manifestation that indicates a jackpot) by a "non-extending display pattern" appears at the special pattern stop timing t1, "jackpot A", which is the most advantageous for the player. In the first close control period, the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs an opening effect such as "Congratulations!" to congratulate the player. Then, for example, at the timing t2 when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts, it is effective to switch to the effect display to the effect that the jackpot game should be started by the right-handed game. The timing tx at which the game ball passes through the gate 6010n tends to arrive relatively earlier than in the case of the extended display performance pattern, and in the subsequent big win game, the big win performance dedicated to the "big win A" is performed. Become. However, when the winning performance by the ``non-extended display performance pattern'' (the ``big hit explicit performance that clearly indicates that it is a big win'') does not appear at the timing t1 when the special symbols are stopped, the ``jackpot A'' which is the most advantageous for the player. ”, on the contrary, it will be possible to grasp that it has not been elected. In this case, it is possible to grasp that any one of ``big win B'' to ``big win E'' has been won when the big win explicit performance appears after the above-mentioned continuous expected performance by the ``extended performance pattern''. It will happen.

In addition, when adopting a method combining (a) and (b), a production lottery table is prepared for each type of jackpot, and while referring to this production lottery table, based on the obtained random number. Then, either the "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a or the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a is selected. That is, by preparing a performance lottery table for each type of big win, it is possible to make the selection rates of the ``extended performance pattern'' and the ``non-extended display performance pattern'' different in each table. As a result, the degree of expectation for the type of the winning jackpot is made different depending on which of the ``extended performance pattern'' and the ``non-extended display performance pattern'' indicates that the jackpot has been won, for example. In addition, the ``non-extended production pattern'' has a lower expectation of winning, but when it is clearly indicated that it is a big hit, the expectation of ``jackpot A'', which has the highest degree of advantage, is high. , ``Extension performance pattern'' has a higher expectation for big win, but when it is clearly indicated that it is a big win, the expectation for ``jackpot A'' with the highest degree of advantage is set to be low. is also possible.

As for the method for selecting the "extended effect pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern", the effect command "05H" shown in FIG. The display effect patterns of "09H" and "12H" can be similarly adopted. However, when it is adopted as the display effect pattern of the effect commands "01H" and "05H", the display effect pattern of the effect commands "03H" and "07H" is changed to the display effect pattern as the winning effect pattern. It can work as a pattern.

Further, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 106(a), the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. ' is associated with, but as shown in FIG. good.

That is, in the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c" associated with the effect command "02H", the display effect is performed by extending the special symbol stop timing t1. , The effect content is only the display effect pattern of the effect command "11H" in the first effect mode (see FIG. 106(c)), and the display effect after the development in which the expectation of the big hit becomes higher. It will be treated as a production content that does not appear. Therefore, in the first effect mode, when the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 96 is received, part of it is allocated to effect contents in which such a developed display effect does not appear. , the winning probability of a small win can be set higher while the appearance probability of the display performance after development in the first performance mode is kept low. In this case, when in the second production mode, the probability of entering the challenge bonus production (expectation for the appearance of the winning production) is increased by the amount that the winning probability of the small win is set higher. By opening the big winning hole 2003, it is possible to give a chance of winning a prize ball with a higher probability.

In this case, in the first effect mode, when the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. c", and dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400. FIG. In addition, as a method for selecting the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" and the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c", for example, the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on random numbers , it is possible to adopt a method of selecting either "an extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a" or "an extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c". When this method is adopted, how many of the values of the random numbers that can be obtained are "extended effect pattern having the content of display effect a" and "extended effect pattern having the content of display effect c". , and depending on the ratio of the pre-associated random numbers, the content of the display effect a when the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 96 is received in the first effect mode. The appearance probabilities of "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c" and "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c" are determined.

In addition, regarding the method of selecting the "extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a" and the "extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect c", the display effect pattern of the above effect command "02H" Besides, the display effect pattern of the effect command "06H" shown in FIG. 96 can be similarly adopted. When it is adopted as the display effect pattern of the effect command ``06H'', a selection is made between an ``extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect b'' and an ``extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect d''. becomes.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation pattern (variation number "15", effect command "15H") shown in FIG. You can omit it. That is, in this case, when opening the big winning opening 2003 in the second effect mode, the challenge bonus effect pattern can always appear.

By the way, in the form of the processing pattern of the game at the time of the big win, the start of the accessory continuous actuating device is triggered by the game ball passing through the valid gate 6010n (in the case of the above-mentioned challenge bonus), in the first place, the small win There is a problem that the player easily grasps that the prize is not a big hit when the prize is won. That is, in the case of a big hit with the operation of the conditional device, the game ball struck to the right is supplied to the game ball guide path unit 6010, the game ball is guided to the effective gate 6010n, and by passing through this, the character continuation is performed. The actuator is activated and the attacker is released. In this way, in the case of a big hit involving the operation of the conditional device, the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device is entrusted to the timing of the player, whereas in the case of a small win without the operation of the conditional device, the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n, i.e., even if the character object continuous operation device does not operate, after the first closed control period with a certain length has elapsed, the big winning opening 2003 will be released. Therefore, even if the liquid crystal display device 1400 (upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244) instructs the player to hit to the right, regardless of whether the player intentionally or not, the player does not hit to the right, or the player delays to hit to the right. A player who is trying to win can easily determine whether the result of the lottery is a big win or a small win.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball struck to the right passes through the effect gate 6011 before passing through the valid gate 6010n, and the preceding effect (notice) is passed before the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n. production) is executed. Therefore, regardless of whether the result of the lottery is a big win or a small win, the player immediately hits to the right based on the instruction of the liquid crystal display device in anticipation of the preceding performance, and even if the game state is a small win. The game ball comes to pass through the valid gate 6010n within the first closed control period. As a result, even if the lottery result is a small hit, the big winning hole 2003 is opened (opened for a short period of time) after the right-handed game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n. It suddenly becomes difficult to determine whether is a big win or a small win. It should be noted that the opening of the large winning opening 2003 for a short period of time after the timing when the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n, if the lottery result is a big hit, for example, the latent probability change state without clearly indicating the probability change state. However, since it can occur, the player can expect that the lottery result will be a big win even if the big winning hole 2003 is opened for a short period of time.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a game ball guideway unit 6010 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a so that all game balls hit to the right are supplied to the game ball guideway unit 6010. FIG. Since the entrance end of the game ball guideway unit 6010 is open at the upper right of the game area 5a, the game ball hit to the right and reached the right side of the game area 5a immediately enters the game ball guideway unit 6010. . Thereafter, after the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 directly below the opening of the game ball guideway unit 6010, it always passes through the effective gate 6010n. Therefore, although the game ball has not passed through the effective gate 6010n at the stage when the game ball has passed through the effect gate 6011, the game machine may perform a preceding effect for the game ball passing through the effective gate. Become.

As described above, the falling speed of the game ball is moderated by the bent portion 6010c and the straight portion 6010d of the game ball guideway unit (which may be called a warp unit) 6010. It passes through the ball guideway unit 6010 and reaches the valid gate 6010n at the bottom of the game ball guideway unit. In this way, the game machine can earn more time than when the game ball freely falls from passing through the performance gate 6011 to passing through the effective gate 6010n. The quality of performance is improved by sufficiently lengthening the processing time for various performance processing such as preceding performance, suggestive performance, advance notice selection, etc. generated when the game ball passes through the performance gate 6011 using time. can do.

Next, an effective embodiment will be described in which game processing is performed when the lottery result is a big win or a small win using the performance gate 6011 and the effective gate 6010n. When the main control board 4100 performs a lottery by entering the ball into the first starting port 2001 and determines whether a big win or a small win is established, the peripheral control board 4140 receives a command from the main control board 4100 and suggests the lottery result. A predetermined performance pattern is determined from among the performance patterns, and a special performance is started. As a special effect, the liquid crystal display device 4100 displays, for example, a duel scene in which an enemy character (boss zombie) appears and the player side character (warrior who fights zombies) fights. Next, the peripheral control board 4140 displays on the liquid crystal display device 4100 a still image of a scene as if the boss zombie were attacking the player, and additionally displays instruction of "right-handed". When the player receives this instruction and hits to the right, the game ball hit to the right passes through the performance gate 6011, and when the peripheral control board 4140 receives the detection signal from the gate sensor, the player's interest is invited from the speaker. A sound effect is sounded before the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n for activating the accessory continuous actuating device. At this point, the player expects or misunderstands that the lottery result is a big win even if it is actually a small win. When the game ball that has passed through the production gate 6011 passes through the effective gate 6010n and the peripheral control board 4140 receives the detection signal from the gate switch of the effective gate 6010n, if the lottery result is a big win, the warrior wins over the zombies. (Big win result presentation) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 to suggest a big win to the player. Then, since the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n and the accessory continuous actuating device is activated, the peripheral control board 4140 controls the opening of the big winning opening 2003 for a plurality of rounds. perform the performance. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a small hit, the main control board 4100 is not triggered by the passage of the game ball through the effective gate 6010n because the accessory continuous operation device is not operated. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 executes an effect that the warrior loses to the zombie (small hit result effect) on the liquid crystal display device 1400, suggesting to the player that it is not a big win. As instructed by the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player hits the game ball to the right without delay, so that the opening of the big winning opening for a short time in the case of a small hit is actually after the game ball has passed through the valid gate 6010n. done.

It should be noted that even if the above-described preceding effect in which the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n is performed without providing the effect gate 6011, the timing at which the game ball is shot by the player is undefined, and the preceding effect occurs prior to the result effect. is difficult to generate. If only the effect of distinguishing whether it is a big hit or a small win other than a big hit is performed when the game ball passes through the effective gate, the effect will be monotonous and uninteresting in the first place. , the player does not have enough incentive to shoot the game ball toward the valid gate 6010n without giving importance to the instruction to hit to the right. As a result, the player may easily find out whether it is a big win or a small win. Therefore, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is provided with the effect gate 6011 as described above. Although the detection information of the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 has been described as input to the peripheral control board 4140, the detection information of the gate switch of the effect gate 6011 may be input to the main control board 4100. . At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 can recognize that the game ball has passed through the performance gate by a command from the main control board 4100 .

Since the preceding effect due to the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 is related to the result effect due to the game ball passing through the valid gate 6010n, the peripheral control board 4140 is arranged in the form of the preceding effect according to the lottery result. may be changed. For example, a high-frequency sound pattern is used as the preceding effect when the lottery result is a big win, and a low-frequency sound pattern is used as a preceding effect when the lottery result is a small win. Further, as a preceding effect, the degree of expectation/reliability for the big win in the lottery result may be displayed in the form of percentage on the liquid crystal display device. Also, a part of the result effect may be displayed as a preceding effect, and the result effect may be in a special form. For example, the result of winning or losing a battle with zombies may be displayed as a preceding effect, and the degree of expectation for a big hit may be displayed as a result effect. Concretely, even if it is a small hit, an effect to overcome zombies is performed in the preceding effect, and a low probability is displayed as a result effect.

Since the effect caused by the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 precedes the passage of the game ball through the effective gate 6010n, the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011 is surely effective within the managed time. Must be able to pass through gate 6010n. Therefore, by directly connecting the performance gate 6011 and the effective gate 6010n using the game ball guideway unit 6010, this is realized. If the effect gate is simply provided on the upper right side of the game area 5a, even if the game ball can pass through the effect gate, it is not always possible to pass through the effective gate 6010n. It is also conceivable to remove the performance gate from the game ball guideway unit 6010 and provide a sensor at the end of the rail 6033, for example. , does not always reach the right area of the game area 5a. Furthermore, the effect gate cannot be provided on the left side of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, the game ball that is hit to the right before the start of the jackpot game and enters the taxiway unit 6010 (game ball wasting means) is isolated from the outside in the game ball taxiway unit. The balls are consumed and wasted without being able to enter the first starting hole 2001 and the general prize winning hole 2004. In other words, the player is forced to abandon the opportunity to participate in the lottery. In order for the game ball to surely pass through the performance gate 6011 in the game ball guideway unit, the gaming machine gives the player an opportunity for additional performance in exchange for compensation for the wasted ball, or a jackpot state. It is possible to change the prior suggestion performance (the performance display of the performance display device 1400) regarding whether to shift to the (advantageous gaming state). Since the additional effect can precede the result effect in a form related to the lottery result effect, compared to the case where the lottery result effect is simply performed, the effect combining the preceding effect and the result effect is high. You can enjoy the benefits of being offered in quality. In this way, the game ball shot by the shooting means to a predetermined area that is not accepted by the predetermined starting port is detected by the main board (specific detection means) by the effect gate 6011 and/or the effective gate 6010n, When a game ball is detected by the specific detection means while a predetermined effect is being performed among the effects performed by the peripheral control board (performance executing means), the player loses the chance to be drawn. It is possible to increase the value of the production by expressing a specific production that can be beneficial to the user (value enhancement means). When the lottery result is a big win or a small win in a normal game state, not in a game state (jackpot game state) in which the big winning opening is not opened (jackpot game state), and not in a time-saving state, after right-handed instruction is given. In the case of a small hit, it is clear that the first game ball that passes through the production gate within the specified time is a useless ball that has no opportunity to enter, although it was launched with the instruction to hit to the right. , the peripheral control board detects this useless ball, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the accumulated number of useless balls between the big hits (the higher the accumulated number, the higher the value of the useless ball), The liquid crystal display device 1400 may display a special treatment effect image or a compensation effect moving image as a special effect (for example, a premium character). Also, if multiple game balls pass through the production gate as useless balls (when a big hit occurs, even if the game ball passes through the effective gate, the game ball passes through the production gate before the big winning opening is opened). ), the peripheral control board 4140 may change the effect according to the number of passing balls. Furthermore, the degree of change in performance may be changed according to the value of the game ball, ie, 4-patch, 1-patch, or the like. For example, in the case of one patch, the degree of change in performance is reduced to 1/4 compared to the case of four patches. In the case of 4-patch, when one game ball causes a predetermined change in performance, in the case of 1-pachi, a similar change in performance occurs only when 4 balls are supplied as useless balls. Each time a one-patch game ball passes through a performance gate as a useless ball, the performance screen is brought into focus or the density of the performance screen is increased.

In the above description, even if the lottery result is a small win, as in the case of a big win, the lottery result effect (zombie loses effect) is performed with the passage of the game ball through the valid gate 6010n as a trigger. In the case of a small win, the condition device is not operated and there is no meaning to activate the accessory continuous actuating device. After passing through the effect gate 6011, the display effect of the lottery result may be performed at the timing of passing through the valid gate 6010n. As described above, the time from when the game ball passes through the performance gate 6011 until it reaches the effective gate 6010n is kept within a specific range by the game ball falling speed reduction means of the game ball guideway unit 6010. Therefore, the game machine can make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the lottery result is a big win or a small win by making the lottery result look like a big win even if the lottery result is a small win.

In addition, when the lottery result is a small win, the result effect performed when the game ball passes through the valid gate 6010n is that the warrior is defeated by the enemy character. You may make it win an enemy character. Also, the performance gate 6011 and/or the effective gate 6010n in the game ball guideway unit 6010 may be made difficult for the player to see, for example, the resin case member of the game ball guideway unit 6010 may be made opaque, Alternatively, the area of the effect gate 6011 and/or the effective gate 6010n may be covered with a decorative plate. By making the effective gate 6010n difficult for the player to see while the effect gate 6011 is visible to the player, the gaming machine allows the player to experience the effect caused by the game ball passing through the effect gate 6011.例文帳に追加The amusement of the game can be improved by suddenly developing into a lottery result performance.

On the other hand, by making the effect gate 6011 difficult for the player to visually recognize, the player is given an unexpected feeling as if a related effect suddenly occurs before the result effect caused by the game ball passing through the valid gate 6010n. can be given to If the lottery result is a small hit and the timing of the player's right-hand shot is delayed, or if the big winning opening has finished opening for a short period of time, the peripheral control board 4140 will cause the game ball to pass through the effect gate. Even if the In addition, the peripheral control board 4140 may cause a movable accessory to behave as a preceding effect when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011, not limited to the above-described sound effect. In addition, as the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011 and subsequently passes through the effective gate 6010n, the peripheral control board 4140 steps up related effects such as sound effect, liquid crystal effect, and movable accessory effect. You can also run it as For example, when the lottery result is a big hit, the amount of motion of the movable role is decreased when the game ball passes through the effect gate 6011, and the amount of motion of the movable role is increased when the game ball passes through the effective gate 6010n. Alternatively, in the former case, a predetermined movable accessory is operated, and in the latter case, another movable accessory is operated. In addition, the gaming machine may change the mode of presentation at the presentation gate 6011 and/or the effective gate 6010n according to the number of passages of game balls through the presentation gate 6011 within a predetermined time. In this way, the game ball always passes through the effect gate 4011 before passing through the valid gate 6010n. ), the player can realize a gaming machine in which the player can expect a big win until the end.

Next, an embodiment of game processing in which the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal device 244 are associated with each other will be described. The upper tray side liquid crystal device 244 is arranged at a position where the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the player cannot see it at the same time, and can serve as an auxiliary display device for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 . When the peripheral control board 4140 displays an effect image on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the lottery result, the game board side liquid crystal display device 4100 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device are always or in the case of a specific game state. Synchronize with In this synchronizing process, the peripheral control board 4140 generates a motion picture related to the effect motion picture displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, in particular, substantially the same effect motion picture as the effect motion picture displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. A moving image is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244.例文帳に追加"Substantially the same" includes completely the same image and almost the same image with the same main part of the image. Therefore, the player can continue playing the game while watching the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 .

In the process of synchronizing the game board side liquid layer display device 1400 and the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control board 4140 validates the player's input to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, and based on this input information. The performance image is changed, and the performance image after the change is developed on both the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244.例文帳に追加Input to the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 can be made by touch, tap, or the like using the touch panel 246 . By using the touch panel, the player's input can be made to the entire surface of the performance displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, and at the same time, the input can be made to a predetermined or desired portion of the display screen. The input information is supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 by the touch panel 244 as two-dimensional coordinate information. The peripheral control board 4140 determines which part of the image being displayed has an input based on the coordinate information, and executes image processing such as changing the area of the input part or branching the development of the moving image. do.

For example, as shown in FIG. 110(a), there is a special game that simulates a warrior (player side character) exploring a Western-style building and attacking and defeating zombies (enemy characters) 8000 and 8002 lurking in the Western-style building. In a mode or scene (when the effect displayed by the game board side liquid layer display device 1400 is a predetermined effect), the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 displays a moving image seen from the warrior's viewpoint. Reference numeral 8004 is a ceiling air-conditioning duct that is part of the structure of the Western-style building. At the initial stage of this mode, the player proceeds with the game while watching the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 continuously before the mode.

The peripheral control device 4140 causes zombies A and B to appear in the Western-style building as the game progresses (state shown in FIG. 110(a)). These zombies will gradually approach the warrior and attack the warrior. If the warrior fails to defeat the zombie before this attack, the footage will switch to the warrior being killed in action by the zombie's attack. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 allows the player side to make an input for a counterattack. The peripheral control board 4140 activates the input to the touch panel, and prompts the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 to look at the side of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 (for example, an icon on the touch panel). ) is displayed to inform the player of the opportunity for input.

When the player turns his or her viewpoint from the game area 5a in front of the player based on this promotional display and looks down at the upper plate outside the game area, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is almost the same as the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. An effect moving image is displayed (FIG. 110(b)). The peripheral control board 4140, on the display screen of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, designates an effective input location, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in (b), it is emphasized so that it can be clearly recognized by the player by making it flash, making it translucent, or changing its color. In the example of FIG. 110(b), since the zombie A area 8000 is flashed, when the player executes input processing by touching or tapping this area, the two-dimensional coordinate information of the input position is displayed. It is sent from the touch panel 246 to the peripheral control board 4140 . When the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the two-dimensional coordinate information is included in the area 8000 of the zombie A, it develops on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 an image of the zombie A being shot down by a warrior. . The same applies to the area 8002 of zombie B. Also, when the area 8004 of the duct is tapped, an image in which the duct falls on the zombies A and B is displayed. Even if the player taps outside the flashed area, since the input position is outside the area where zombies A and B can be defeated, an image for attacking zombies A and B is not developed. In this way, when the player makes an input to a desired point in almost the entire area of the display screen of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, the peripheral control board 4140 performs the input based on the specific information (coordinates) of the input point. Judges the propriety of the input. The game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 also displays an image of a process that changes according to the player's input in the same way as the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, an effect (flash, etc.) that suggests a suitable input area to the player is not performed. In order to direct the player's attention to the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, the aforementioned promotion display may be continuously displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400. FIG. Note that the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 and the touch panel correspond to an operable display portion that can be operated by the player, and the peripheral control board (operation-containing effect display means) displays a predetermined effect on the operable display portion. indicate.

A suitable input area changes moment by moment according to the development of the presentation. For example, when zombie A, who is closest to the warrior, approaches the warrior further, and the time has come when the warrior cannot attack in time, the peripheral control board 4140 displays the zombie A on the display screen of the upper tray liquid crystal display device 244. , the input recommendation effect (flash) for the area 8000 is terminated. In addition, without losing the input recommendation effect, the input coordinate position is within the appropriate input range (flash area) according to the distance from the input target (zombie A area 8000) to the warrior side or the input timing. However, in the input result determination, the peripheral control board 4140 may determine that the input to the input target is unsuccessful.

Since the synchronous effect images displayed on the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 are based on the lottery results, the player eliminates all the attacking zombies and the warrior becomes a warrior. In order to succeed in escaping from the Western-style building, the player energetically tries to perform input to the touch panel 246. - 特許庁The peripheral control board 4140 can change the target displayed on the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 according to the result of the lottery. For example, if the lottery result is a big hit, the number of zombies will be reduced, the attack power to zombies will be increased, or the defense power of zombies will be decreased. Make it easier for the production to proceed successfully (the warrior escapes from the Western-style building) by making it possible to defeat zombies with a single tap. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss or a small hit, even if the player's operation is skillful, the performance is likely to fail (the warrior fails to escape from the Western-style building). For example, the recommended input area is operated accurately and more times than other players, and the peripheral control board reduces the number of inputs by the player or damages the enemy character per input. No matter how good the player's action for operation is, such as reducing the number of inputs, or not actually validating input to a part of the input recommendation area shown to the player, etc. Or, no matter how fast you operate. Causes the operation to result in failure. The player can expect that the lottery result will be a big hit if his/her own input is effectively changed to the effect display, for example, if the zombies are efficiently exterminated.

By synchronizing the effect of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 and the effect of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 and enabling the player to input to the effect on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, the player can It is possible to reflect the change in the effect due to the input to the effect of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 as well. Therefore, while there is an effect that the effect in the game area 5a is developed and expanded beyond the game area, the attention of the player is directed to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 is focused. There is also concern that attention may be neglected. Since the final branch effect as to whether the lottery result is a big win or not is performed on the game board side (game area side), it is beneficial to make the player pay attention to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 at this point. If the player continues to pay attention to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, he/she does not notice or is late in noticing the final performance of whether or not the lottery result on the game board side is a big win. On the other hand, it may be difficult to require the player to pay attention to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 while paying attention to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 . Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 executes an effect for giving the player an opportunity to refocus on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 . The peripheral control board 4140, for example, generates a ringing sound, notifies the display of "Look at the front liquid crystal" from the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244, or moves the falling movable accessory 6250 described above to the center. Due to the surprise action of the movable role such as suddenly dropping from the back side of the upper part of the role 2300 to the front of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, the upper plate is dropped before the execution of the final branch effect or immediately after the start of execution of the final branch effect. The viewpoint of the player who pays attention to the side liquid crystal display device 244 is drawn to the game board side.

The form of input allowed on the touch panel 246 is not limited to the form of attacking a specific display area such as zombies, as described above. For example, depending on which one of the direction keys displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 is touched by the player, the peripheral control board 4140 changes the traveling direction in the warrior's activity area (western-style building). An image is displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 and the peripheral control board 4140 . Also, other input devices (effect buttons, effect dials) can be used to assist or reinforce input on the touch panel 246 . Although the touch panel input is specified as two-dimensional information as described above, input information can be diversified by using information from other input devices as additional dimensional information. For example, by combining a touch sensor with a pressure sensor, the peripheral control board 4140 can use the player's pressure on the panel of the touch sensor in addition to the two-dimensional information from the touch. The pressing force can be used as information in the z-axis direction or as information indicating directionality. In addition, a small camera is incorporated in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244, and the peripheral control board 4140 detects the player's line of sight direction using face recognition technology based on information from the small camera. It can be determined whether or not the player is paying attention to the device 244 (whether or not the player is paying attention to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400).

Since the input encouragement effect (flash) in the specific area displayed on the above-described upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is not displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, it is unique information directed to the player side. , and other specific information, for example, expectation level information in the case where an attack against zombies is successful and a big win can be expected. When the player pays attention to the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, the player's head is tilted to the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244, and the game viewers around the player are on the upper dish side. It becomes easy to appreciate the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 synchronized with the effect screen of the liquid crystal display device 244.例文帳に追加At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 monitors the player's input status, and provides information suitable for surrounding game viewers, for example, information evaluating the player's input superiority (e.g. A text display indicating that the player is likely to win, etc.) may be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 as unique information.

The touch panel increases the degree of freedom of the player's input, and the display of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 as well as the display of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 is changed in synchronism with the input. The player himself/herself can change the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400 to a desired form, and as a result, it is possible to improve the player's sense of participation in the production and increase the interest in the game. It should be noted that the peripheral control board 4140 may synchronize the display image of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 and the display image of the game board side display device 1400, but may have different display formats. For example, the former image may be displayed from the player's character's subjective point of view (the warrior's own point of view), and the latter image may be displayed from an objective point of view that looks down on the player's character. Alternatively, the latter image may be an image of the warrior as viewed from the zombie side. It should be noted that it is possible to enable image input to the side of the game board side display device 1400, for example, by providing a touch panel on the front glass of the game board. Since it is a heavy burden to operate on the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 side and the operation can be visually recognized from the surroundings, it is preferable to operate from the side of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 side. Also, by constructing the data space for the effect from three-dimensional data, the player can control the position of the virtual camera with the touch panel and change the effect screen with a higher degree of freedom. Furthermore, by changing the position of the virtual camera between the effect displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 and the effect displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1400, different effect images can be produced in the same image processing space. can be displayed.

In the gaming machine described here, when a predetermined effect among the effects executed by the effect executing means (peripheral control board 4140) is being performed, the auxiliary display device (upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244) is given an operation opportunity. Furthermore, substantially the same as the predetermined effect displayed on the effect display device (game board side display device 1400) so that the player can grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the auxiliary display device. By displaying the effect on the auxiliary display device, the effect can be developed beyond the game area (5a) (border crossing means), so that the player can be actively encouraged to participate in the game. , As a result, the quality of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine described here, when a predetermined effect is displayed on the display screen (operable display section) of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 244 by the peripheral control board 4140 (operation-containing effect display means), the upper An operation opportunity can be provided by making substantially the entire display area of the dish-side liquid crystal display device 244 or substantially the entire range in which a predetermined effect is displayed as an operation target (regional operation target means). When the entire area is operable, even if any area is operated out of the substantially entire area, by varying the display mode of the predetermined effect based on the operated area, the predetermined effect can be performed according to the player's intention. (desired performance creating means), so that the player can be positively motivated to participate in the game, and the quality of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the above-mentioned entire operable range may be changed according to the content of the predetermined effect displayed on the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 244 .

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine. The invention can be applied. Considering the application of the present invention to a pachi-slot machine, the "game ball" in each of the above configurations may be used as the "game medium".

A pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which the medium inserted into the machine, such as game balls, is the same as the medium used in actual games played by the player. It is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball inserted. Specifically, "a shooting device that shoots a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, a large number of obstacle nails, center accessories, display means, etc. A game area provided with appropriate ball entrances such as openings, passing holes, and arrival holes for game balls to enter, rails for guiding game balls from the launcher to the game area, and game balls guided to the game area. A payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entry of a game ball into a ball entrance or according to the manner in which game balls enter a plurality of ball entrances.

It should be noted that there are various types of pachinko machines; detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the entering ball is detected by the ball entry state detection means, and special symbol display means for varying and stopping the variation of special symbols according to the lottery result of the lottery means. ” and “In addition, while the special symbols are changing, the decorative pattern row made up of a plurality of decorative patterns is variably displayed, and a performance image display means for making a character etc. appear at a predetermined timing is further provided.” , typified by what is generally called a ``complex machine'' ``equipped with a lottery means for performing a lottery by distributing game balls in the role and a lottery means for performing a lottery by winning a prize at the start gate'' In general, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16, and is represented by what is generally called an ʻarepachi`, and depending on the manner in which the game balls enter a plurality of ball entrances in one game, , which pays out a predetermined number of game balls".

On the other hand, a pachislot machine inserts medals, which are game media, and after inserting the medals, variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in accordance with the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). It is a slot machine with a stop operation function, in which a substantial game is performed such that the variation of the pattern row is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). It should be noted that if the stop operation means is not operated even after a predetermined period of time has passed, the variation of the symbol row may be stopped according to the passage of the predetermined period of time. When the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol row is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied condition, or a large amount of medals can be obtained by the player. , to generate a special advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine uses a plurality of (for example, five) game balls as one unit of input medium, and after inputting the input medium, an operation means for starting (for example, an operation lever ), the symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and thereafter, the variation of the symbol row is stopped according to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button). It should be noted that if the stop operation means is not operated even after a predetermined period of time has passed, the variation of the symbol row may be stopped according to the passage of the predetermined period of time. When the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol row is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied condition, or a large amount of medals can be obtained by the player. , to generate a special advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, gaming machines such as pachislot machines and gaming machines that combine a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, where games are not actually played depending on the medium that is inserted, seem to have no game media at first glance. However, even with such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that the overall game content includes games using game balls and other appropriate items. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be used as a gaming machine in which games are played using game media.

Moreover, although the effect display device in the above-described embodiments is preferably a liquid crystal display device, it is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. A display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, or a CRT may be used.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 200 plate unit 201 upper plate (storage portion) 210 plate unit base 212 upper plate main body (storage portion) 212a guidance passage portion 220 effect operation unit 220A installation Base unit 220B Touch unit 220C Button unit 244 Upper tray liquid crystal display device (image display device) 246 Touch panel 257 Upper tray effect button (press button) 260 Plate unit cover (bulging member) 261 Lower tray opening 262 Upper tray lower covering section 6010 Game ball taxiway unit 6010n Effective gate 6011 Effect gate

Claims (1)

launching means for selectively launching game balls into a first area of the game area and a second area different from the first area based on the player's operation;
A specific starting port capable of accepting a game ball hit into the first area of the game area;
A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the specific starting port;
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win;
a specific area provided in the second area where the game ball is hit in a game state more advantageous to the player than the game state in which the game ball is hit into the first area, and through which the hit game ball can pass;
a specific detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising
The production execution means, in the period in which the specific production is executed, based on the fact that the specific detection means has detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the second area, a plurality of types It is possible to execute a special effect indicating which one of the winning results is a winning result,
The special performance is
Based on the fact that the game ball passed through the specific area during the period in which the specific effect is executed before the specific winning game state is started, which can be executed based on the result of the lottery being the specific winning result While being executed, it is an effect that is not executed even if the game ball passes through the specific area after the end of the specific per game state,
The player is encouraged to launch the game ball into the second area during the period during which the specific effect is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area. display can be performed,
When the specific detection means detects that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the specific area in a state in which the player is not notified of the winning even though the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win. A gaming machine characterized in that a special notification different from the special performance can be executed for the player immediately.

Images